579529
59
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/426
Pagina verder
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
BASIC
User’s Guide
BASIC
User’s Guide
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and
troubleshooting on Windows.
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and
troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
2
BASIC
1. Introduction
Key benefits 5
Features by model 7
Useful to know 15
About this user’s guide 16
Safety information 17
Machine overview 22
Control panel overview 26
Turning on the machine 31
Installing the driver locally 32
Reinstalling the driver 34
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview 36
Machine’s basic settings 47
Media and tray 49
Basic printing 65
Basic copying 72
Basic scanning 77
Basic faxing 78
Using USB memory device 82
3. Maintenance
Ordering supplies and accessories 89
Available consumables 90
Available accessories 92
Available maintenance parts 93
Storing the toner cartridge 94
Redistributing toner 96
Replacing the toner cartridge 98
Replacing the waste toner container 101
Installing accessories 103
Monitoring the supplies life 107
Setting the toner low alert 108
Cleaning the machine 109
Tips for moving & storing your machine 115
3
BASIC
4. Troubleshooting
Tips for avoiding paper jams 117
Clearing original document jams 118
Clearing paper jams 123
Understanding the status LED 135
Understanding display messages 137
5. Appendix
Specifications 144
Regulatory information 157
Copyright 170
1. Introduction
This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine.
•Key benefits 5
Features by model 7
Useful to know 15
About this user’s guide 16
Safety information 17
Machine overview 22
Control panel overview 26
Turning on the machine 31
Installing the driver locally 32
Reinstalling the driver 34
Key benefits
Environmentally friendly
To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature (see "Eco
printing" on page 69).
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper
(see "Using advanced print features" on page 298).
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided
printing) (see "Using advanced print features" on page 298).
To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy.
Fast high resolution printing
You can print in a full range of colors using cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600
x 600 x 4 bit).
Fast, on-demand printing.
- C145x series
For single-side printing, up to 14 ppm (A4) or up to 15 ppm (Letter).
- CLX-419x series /C186x series
For single-side printing, up to 18 ppm (A4) or up to 19 ppm (Letter).
- CLX-626x series
For single-side printing, up to 24 ppm (A4) or up to 25 ppm (Letter).
For duplex printing, up to 12 ppm (A4) or up to 12 ppm (Letter).
Convenience
Simply touch your mobile device on the NFC tag on your printer and get the
print job done (see "Using the NFC feature" on page 238).
You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google
Cloud Print™ enabled apps (see "Google Cloud Print™" on page 247).
Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Easy Capture
Manager" on page 336).
Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that
monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to
customize the machine’s settings (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
page 348 or "Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager" on page 345).
Key benefits
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan,
compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax (see
"Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 344).
AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the
ordinary program (see "Samsung AnyWeb Print" on page 338).
Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available
only for Windows.
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine
drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads.
Wide range of functionality and application support
Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as
Confidential” (see "Using advanced print features" on page 298).
You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on
page 153).
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.
Supports various wireless network setting method
Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) button
- You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on
the machine and the access point (a wireless router).
Using the USB cable or a network cable
- You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB
cable or a network cable.
Using the Wi-Fi Direct
- You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or
Wi-Fi Direct feature.
See "Introducing wireless set up methods" on page 196.
Features by model
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.
Operating System
(: Included, Blank: Not available)
Operating System
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Windows
Mac
Linux
Unix
Features by model
Software
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window.
Software
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
SPL printer driver
PCL printer driver
PS printer driver
(C145xFW/
C186xFW
a
)
XPS printer driver
a
Direct Printing Utility
a
Samsung Easy
Printer Manager
Scan to PC settings
Fax to PC settings
(CLX-419xFN only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-
626xFR only)
Device Settings
Samsung Printer Status
Samsung AnyWeb Print
a
Features by model
(: Included, Blank: Not available)
Samsung Easy Document Creator
Easy Capture Manager
Samsung Easy Color Manager
a
SyncThru™ Web Service
SyncThru Admin Web Service
Easy Eco Driver
Fax Samsung Network PC Fax
(CLX-419xFN only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-
626xFR only)
Scan Twain scan driver
WIA scan driver
a. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Before installing, check whether your
computer’s OS support the software.
Software
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Features by model
Variety feature
Features
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/
1000 Base TX wired LAN
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n
wireless LAN
a
NFC (Near Field Communication)
(C145xFW/C186xFW
only)
Google Cloud Print™
AirPrint
Eco printing
Duplex (2-sided) printing
Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual)
bc
USB memory interface
Memory module
Optional tray (Tray2)
Mass Storage Device
d
Features by model
Document
Feeder
Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder
(DADF)
(CLX-626xFR only)
Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)
(CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD only)
Handset
Features
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Features by model
Fax Multi-send
(CLX-419xFN only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
Delay send
(CLX-419xFN only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
Priority send
Duplex send
(CLX-626xFR only)
Secure receive
(CLX-419xFN only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
Duplex print
(CLX-626xFR only)
Send/ Receive forward -
fax
(CLX-419xFN only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
Send/ Receive forward -
email
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
Send/ Receive forward -
server
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
Features
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Features by model
Scan Scanning to email
Scanning to SMB server
Scanning to FTP server
Duplex scan
(CLX-626xFR only)
Scan to PC
Features
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Features by model
(: Included, : Optional, Blank: Not available)
Copy ID card copying
Reduced or enlarged
copying
Collation
Poster
Clone
Auto Fit
Book
2-up/4-up
Adjust background
Margin shift
Edge erase
Gray enhance
Duplex copy
a. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some countries, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you
bought your machine.
b. Available for Windows OS only.
c. Only tray1 is supported.
d. The machine is equipped with 4GB of SD (secure digital) card.
Features
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Useful to know
The machine does not print.
Open the print queue list and remove the document from the
list (see "Canceling a print job" on page 66).
Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver
locally" on page 32).
Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows
(see "Setting your machine as a default machine" on page 297).
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.
Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region
to view product service information.
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.
Turn the product off and on again.
Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and
troubleshoot accordingly (see "Understanding the status LED"
on page 135).
A paper jam has occurred.
Open and close the door (see "Front view" on page 23).
Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper
jams" on page 123).
Printouts are blurry.
The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner
cartridge (see "Redistributing toner" on page 96).
Try a different print resolution setting (see "Opening printing
preferences" on page 67).
Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 98).
Where can I download the machine’s driver?
You can get help, support application, machine drivers,
manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or
Downloads.
16
1. Introduction
About this user’s guide
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.
Do not discard this manual, and keep it for future reference.
Read the safety information before using the machine.
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting
chapter.
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or model you purchased.
The screenshots in this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
1
Conventions
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
Document is synonymous with original.
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
Machine refers to printer or MFP.
2
General icons
Icon Text Description
Caution
Gives users information to protect the machine from
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.
Warning Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury.
Note
Provides additional information or detailed
specification of the machine function and feature.
17
1. Introduction
Safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
3
Important safety symbols
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter
4
Operating environment
Warning
Warning
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe
personal injury or death.
Caution
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor
personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is
not grounded.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off
the power switch and unplug the machine.
The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy
object could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the
plug with wet hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Safety information
18
1. Introduction
Caution
5
Operating method
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Burns could occur.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and
request assistance from qualified service personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could
result in electric shock.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
It can cause damage to the machine.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper
tray.
You may get injured.
Be careful when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.
Burns can occur.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal
objects.
It can damage the machine.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.
It can damage the machine.
Safety information
19
1. Introduction
6
Installation / Moving
Warning
Caution
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can
cause damage or fire.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water
leaks.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Place the machine in the environment where it meets the
operating temperature and humidity specification. Otherwise,
quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine (see
"General specifications" on page 144).
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the
units weight.
If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do
not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate
amount of people to lift the device safely.
Then lift the machine:
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.
If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift
with 2 people.
If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or
more people.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place
the machine. Also consider the space required to open the cover
and trays.
The place should be well-ventilated and be far from direct light,
heat, and humidity.
When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a
large number of pages in a non-ventilated space, it could pollute
the air and be harmful to your health. Place the machine in a well-
ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically.
Safety information
20
1. Introduction
7
Maintenance / Checking
Caution
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Use only No.26 AWG
a
or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or
larger.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result
in electric shock or fire.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock
or fire.
The machine should be connected to
the power level which is specified on the label.
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,
contact the electrical utility company.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
You could get injured.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
Children could get hurt.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the
machine needs repairing.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide
provided with the machine.
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
Safety information
21
1. Introduction
8
Supply usage
Caution
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in
fire or electric shock.
The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser
unit.
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away
from children.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the
machine.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service
fee will be charged.
For supplies that contain toner dust (toner cartridge, waste toner
bottle, imaging unit, etc.) follow the instructions below.
When disposing of the supplies, follow the instructions for
disposal. Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions.
Do not wash the supplies.
For a waste toner bottle, do not reuse it after emptying the
bottle.
If you do not follow the instructions above, it may cause machine
malfunction and environmental pollution. The warranty does not
cover damages caused by a user’s carelessness.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
22
1. Introduction
Machine overview
9
Components
Machine Power cord Quick installation guide
Software CD
a
a. The software CD contains the print drivers, user’s guide, and software applications.
Misc. accessories
b
b. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.
Machine overview
23
1. Introduction
10
Front view
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.
There are various types of machine.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
CLX-419x series/ C145x series/C186x series/CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD
14
13
2
1
4
7
5
8
3
12
6
10
17
18
19
20
21
15
16
G
11
9
1 Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) cover
12
Front cover handle
2 Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) width guide
13
Scanner lid
3 Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) input tray
14
Scanner glass
4 Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) output tray
15 Paper width guides on a manual
feeder
5 Control panel 16 Manual feeder
6
Control board cover
17 Paper width guides on a multi-
purpose tray
a
a. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD only.
7
Front cover
18
Multi-purpose support tray
a
8 Tray 1 19 Toner cartridge
9 USB memory port 20 Toner cartridge handle
10 Output tray 21 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
11
Document feeder output support
22
NFC tag
b
(Near Field
Communication)
b. C145xFW/C186xFW only.
22
Machine overview
24
1. Introduction
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW
1 Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) cover
13
Output tray
2 Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) width guide
14
Document feeder output support
3 Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) input tray
15
Front cover handle
17
18
19
23
20
16
15
2
1
3
4
7
9
5
6
8
10
11
22
21
14
13
12
4 Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) output tray
16
Scanner lid
5 Control panel 17 Scanner glass
6
Control board cover
18 Paper width guides on a multi-
purpose tray
7 Front cover 19 Multi-purpose support tray
8 Tray 1 20 Toner cartridge
9
Optional tray
a
21 Toner cartridge handle
10 Push-release of Multi-purpose
tray
22
Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
11 Multi-purpose tray 23 Duplex jam cover
12 USB memory port
a. This is an optional feature. CLX-626x series only.
Machine overview
25
1. Introduction
11
Rear view
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model. There are various types of machine.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series CLX-626x series
1 Waster toner container 4 Power receptacle 7 Network port
2
Rear cover
5
Power-switch
8
Telephone line socket (LINE)
a
a. CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW only.
3
Rear cover handle
6
USB port
9
Extension telephone socket (EXT.)
a
23
6
7
5
4
8 9
1
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8 9
1
26
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. There are various types of control panels.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Some buttons may not work depending on the mode (copy, fax, or scan).
12
Type A(CLX-419xN/ C145xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR)
1 Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading, when the original contains faint markings and dark images.
2
ID Copy
a
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID card copying" on page 75).
Scan to
b
Sends scanned data.
6
12
2
1
3
4
5 6
7
8 9 10 11
20
19
18
17
16
15 14
21
13
Control panel overview
27
1. Introduction
3 Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.
4
Copy
a
Switches to Copy mode.
5
Fax
a
Switches to Fax mode.
6 Arrows Scroll through the options available in the selected menu, and increase or decrease values.
7 OK Confirms the selection on the screen.
8 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290).
9 Address Book Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers (see "Storing email address" on page 288 or "Setting
up the fax address book" on page 291).
10
Redial/Pause
a
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode (see
"Redialing the fax number" on page 322).
11
Stop/Clear
Stops current operation.
12
Power/Wake Up
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button
for more than three seconds.
13
Start
Color
Begins a printing job in color mode.
Black
Begins a printing job in black and white mode.
14
On Hook Dial
a
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone (see
"Receiving manually in Tel mode" on page 328).
Control panel overview
28
1. Introduction
15
Back
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
16
Menu
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (see "Menu overview" on page 36).
17
Scan
a
Switches to Scan mode.
18
Toner colors
Show the status of each toner cartridge. If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced, the Status LED turns red and the display
shows the message. However, the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new cartridge (see
"Toner-related messages" on page 138).
19 Status LED Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 135).
20
Eco
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc-printing and copying only (see "Eco printing" on page
69).
21 Direct USB Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine.
a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
b. CLX-419xN/ C145xN/ CLX-626xND only.
Control panel overview
29
1. Introduction
13
Type B(CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW/CLX-626xFW)
1 Display screen Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation.
2 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290).
3 Clear Deletes characters in the edit area.
4
Stop
Stops an operations at any time.
5
Power/Wake
Up
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button for
more than three seconds.
Control panel overview
30
1. Introduction
6
Start
Starts a job in black or color mode.
7
On Hook Dial
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone (see
"Receiving manually in Tel mode" on page 328).
8 Help Gives detailed information about this machine’s menus or status.
9 Reset Resets the current machine’s setup.
10 Wireless LED Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 135).
11 Status LED Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 135).
31
1. Introduction
Turning on the machine
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
page 23).
1
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.
2
Turn the power switch on.
1
2
32
1. Introduction
Installing the driver locally
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see
"Installing driver over the network" on page 184).
If you are a Mac, Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
"Installation for Mac" on page 175 or "Installation for Linux" on page 177
or "Installing the UNIX printer driver package" on page 190.
The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the
machine and interface in use.
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
14
Windows
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then,
click Next.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install
window.
Installing the driver locally
33
1. Introduction
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
1
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered
on.
2
Make sure that the machine is powered on.
3
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable.
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
34
1. Introduction
Reinstalling the driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall
the driver.
15
Windows
1
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Uninstall Samsung Printer Software.
2
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
3
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver
again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 32).
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start
screen.
3
Follow the instructions in the window.
If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, unintstall from the
desktop screen mode.
If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.
Reinstalling the driver
35
1. Introduction
2. Menu Overview and
Basic Setup
This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options.
Menu overview 36
Machine’s basic settings 47
Media and tray 49
Basic printing 65
Basic copying 72
Basic scanning 77
Basic faxing 78
Using USB memory device 82
36
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions.
An checked (√) appears next to the currently selected menu.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting Menus" on page 250).
1
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ C145xN/ CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR
Accessing the menu
1
Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel depending on the feature to be used.
2
Select (Menu) until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK.
3
Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK.
4
If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.
5
Press OK to save the selection.
6
Press (Stop/Clear) button to return to the ready mode.
Menu overview
37
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Fax Feature
a
(see "Fax Feature" on page 259)
Fax Setup
a
(see "Sending setup" on page 261,
"Change Default setup" on page 263,
"Change Default setup" on page 263)
Copy Feature
(see "Copy feature" on page 253)
Darkness
Light+5- Light+1
Normal
Dark+1- Dark+5
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Original Size
Duplex
b
1 Sided
2 Sided
2 Sided Rotated
Multi Send
Delay Send
Send Forward
Forward to Fax
Forward to Email
c
Forward to
Server
c
Receive Forward
Forward to Fax
Forward to PC
Forward to Email
c
Forward to
Server
c
Forward & Print
Secure Receive
Off
On
Print
Cancel Job
Sending
Redial Times
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Fax
Confirmation
Image TCR
Dial Mode
d
Toll Save
Receiving
Receive Mode
Fax
Tel
Ans/Fax
DRPD Mode
de
Ring to Answer
Stamp RCV
Name
Rcv Start Code
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
DRPD Mode
de
Duplex Print
b
Change Default
Resolution
Darkness
Original Type
Original Size
Duplex
b
Original Size
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplex
f
1 Sided
1->2Sided
1->2Sided Rotated
2->1Sided
2->2Sided
2->1Sided Rotated
Auto Color
Darkness
Light+5- Light+1
Normal
Dark+1- Dark+5
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Magazine
Layout
Normal
2-Up
4-Up
ID Copy
BookCopy
Adjust Background
Off
Auto
Enhance Lev.1
Enhance Lev.2
Erase Lev.1- Erase
Lev.4
Edge Erase
g
Off
Small
Original
h
Hole Punch
Book
Center
i
Border
Erase
Stamp
g
Item
Opacity
j
Position
j
WaterMark
g
Message
Pages
k
Menu overview
38
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
b. CLX-626xFR only.
c. CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
d. This option may not be available depending on your country.
e. CLX-419xFN only.
f. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
g. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
h. This option does not appear when the 2-Up, 4-Up, Book copy, Duplex, Auto Fit option is on or the original document is loaded in ADF(DADF).
i. This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy.
j. This option appears only when the Item option is On.
k. This option does not appear when the Message option is Off.
Menu overview
39
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Copy Setup
(see "Copy Setup" on page 258)
Scan Feature
(see "Scan feature" on page 264)
Scan Setup
(see "Scan setup" on page
266)
Print Setup
(see "Print" on page 252)
Change Default
Original Size
Copies
Copy Collation
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplex
a
1 Sided
1->2Sided
1->2Sided Rotated
2->1Sided
2->2Sided
2->1Sided Rotated
Auto Color
Darkness
Light+5- Light+1
Normal
Dark+1- Dark+5
a. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
Original
Type
Text
Text/
Photo
Photo
Magazine
USB Feature
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
Color
Gray
Mono
File Format
Duplex
b
Darkness
Email Feature
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
Duplex
b
b. CLX-626xFR only.
Darkness
FTP Feature
c
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
Duplex
b
Darkness
SMB Feature
c
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
Duplex
b
Darkness
c. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
Change Default
USB Default
Email Default
FTP/SMB Default
c
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
Duplex
b
Darkness
Server Confirmation
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Copies
Resolution
Normal
Best
Clear Text
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
Off
Edge Enhance
Off
Normal
Maximum
Trapping
Off
Medium
Maximum
Screen
Normal
Enhanced
Detailed
Emulation
Emulation Type
Setup
Menu overview
40
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
System Setup
(see "System setup" on page 269)
Machine Setup
Machine ID
a
Fax Number
a
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Language
Default Mode
a
Power Save
Wakeup Event
System Timeout
Job Timeout
Altitude
Adjustment
Humidity
Auto Continue
0 Sec
30 Sec
Off
Auto CR
Auto Tray Switch
b
Paper Substitution
Tray Protection
b
Skip Blank Pages
PDF Type
Stamp
b
Import Setting
Export Setting
Eco Settings
Vapor Mode
Off
On
Auto
Auto Power Off
Off
On
Paper Setup
Paper Size
Tray 1
Tray 2
c
MP Tray
b
Manual Feeder
d
Change Default
Paper Type
Paper Source
Margin
Tray Confirm
Sound
a
Key Sound
Alarm Sound
Fax Sound
Report
Configuration
Supplies Info.
Demo Page
Address Book
Fax Send
Confirmation
a
Fax Sent
a
E-mail Sent
Fax Received
a
Fax Scheduled
Jobs
a
Network
Configuration
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Usage Counter
Account
Maintenance
CLR Empty Msg.
e
Supplies Life
Image Mgr.
Custom Color
Auto Color Reg.
Tone Adjustment
Default
Auto Tone Adj.
Standard tone
Cal. ID Sensor
TonerLow Alert
Serial Number
Ram Disk
c
Paper Stacking
Job Manage.
bf
Active Job
Secured Job
Stored Job
Menu overview
41
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
b. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
c. This is an optional feature.CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
d. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ C145xN only.
e. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
f. This option is available when the optional mass storage device, optional memory or Ram disk is installed.
Network
(see "Network setup" on page 280)
TCP/IP (IPv4)
DHCP
BOOTP
Static
TCP/IP (IPv6)
IPv6 Activate
DHCPv6 Config
Ethernet Speed
Automatic
10Mbps Half
10Mbps Full
100Mbps Half
100Mbps Full
1Gbps Full
802.1x
Clear Settings
Network Configuration
Net. Activate
Http Activate
WINS
SNMP V1/V2
SNTP
UPnP(SSDP)
MDNS
SetIP
SLP
Menu overview
42
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
2
CLX-419xFW/CLX-626xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW
You can set menus easily using the touch screen.
The Main screen is shown on the touch screen on the control panel.
Some menus are grayed out depending on your options or models.
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
Introducing the Home Screen
(Copy): When you press Copy from the display screen, the Copy
screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options.
(Scan): When you press Scan from the display screen, the Scan screen
appears which has several tabs and lots of Scanning options.
(Fax): When you press Fax from the display screen, the Fax screen
appears which has several tabs and lots of Faxing options.
(Setup): You can browse current machine settings or change machine
values.
(Job Status): Job status shows the jobs currently running, completed
job or in queue.
(Eco): You can view the eco settings.
(Direct USB): Enters the USB menu when USB memory is inserted into
the USB memory port on your machine.
(Document Box): You can store the printing data, print the secure page
or shared folder.
: Shows the toner status.
: Selects the LCD brightness and language.
: Scroll through available options.
Menu overview
43
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Copy
(see "Copy" on page 253)
Fax
(see "Fax" on page 259)
Basic Copy
Darkness
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Magazine
Color Mode
Auto
Color
Mono
Custom Copy
Duplex
a
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
Tray
a. CLX-626xFW only.
Auto
Tray1
Tray2
b
MP Tray
a
Manual Feeder
c
Layout
Off
Collation
2-up
4-up
ID Copy
Book Copy
Adjust Background
Edge Erase
a
Off
SmallOriginal
Hole Punch
Book Center
d
b. This is an optional feature. CLX-626xFW only.
c. CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFWonly.
d. This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy.
Border Erase
Stamp
a
Item
Opacity
Position
Watermark
a
ID Copy
Darkness
Color Mode
Color
Mono
Auto Fit Copy
Darkness
Original Type
Color Mode
Collate Copy
Duplex
a
Darkness
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
N-up Copy
Duplex
a
Darkness
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
N-up
Book Copy
Darkness
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
Book Copy
Memory Send
Darkness
Resolution
Duplex
a
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
On Hook Dial
Darkness
Resolution
Duplex
a
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
Delayed Send
Darkness
Resolution
Duplex
a
Original Type
Original Size
SpeedDial Send
Darkness
Resolution
Duplex
a
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
Group Dial Send
Darkness
Resolution
Duplex
a
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
Redial
Darkness
Resolution
Duplex
a
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
Menu overview
44
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Scan
(see "Scan" on page 264)
Eco
(see "Eco" on page 284)
Local PC
Destination
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
ab
Duplex
a
Original Size
Original Type
Darkness
Network PC
Destination
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
ab
Duplex
a
Original Size
Original Type
Darkness
a. CLX-626xFW only.
b. This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type.
Send Email
To
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
ab
Duplex
a
Darkness
File Name
SMB
a
Destination
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
b
Duplex
Darkness
File Name
FTP
a
Destination
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
b
Duplex
Darkness
File Name
Custom Email
To
Subject
From
CC
BCC
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
PDF Encryption
ab
Duplex
a
Darkness
File Name
USB
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Name
File Format
PDF Encryption
ab
Duplex
a
Darkness
File Policy
Shared Folder
a
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Name
File Format
PDF Encryption
b
Duplex
Darkness
File Policy
WSD
Eco-On
On
Off
Settings
Default Mode
On
Off
On-Forced
c
Feature Configuration
Default
Custom
c. If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings
> Eco), the On force message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode status.
Menu overview
45
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Direct USB
(see "Direct USB"
on page 285)
Setup
(see "System setup" on page 269)
Print From
Auto Fit
Copies
Duplex
a
Select Tray
Color Mode
Scan to USB
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Name
File Format
PDF
Encryption
b
Duplex
a
Darkness
File Policy
File Manage
Show Space
Machine Setup
Default Setting
Copy Default
Scan Default
Fax Default
Paper Setup
Tray1
Tray2
c
MP Tray
a
Manual Feeder
d
Margin
Tray Behaviour
Auto Tray Switch
a
Auto Continue
Paper Substitution
Tray Protection
a
Address Book
PhoneBook
Email
Print
Reset
Reports
Configuration
Supplies Information
Demo Page
Help List
Address Book
Fax Send Confirmation
Fax Sent
Email Sent
Fax Received
Fax Schedule Jobs
Network Configuration
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Usage Counter
Account
Fax Setup
Send Forward
Receive Forward
Toll Save
Secure Receive
Prefix Dial
Stmp Rcvd Name
ECM Mode
Modem Speed
Image TCR
Setup Wizard
Network Setup
Ethernet Speed
TCP/IP (IPv4)
TCP/IP (IPv6)
802.1x
Ethernet Activate
Http Activate
WINS
SNMP V1/V2
SNTP
UPnP(SSDP)
MDNS
SetIP
SLP
Wireless
Wi-Fi ON/OFF
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct On/
Off
Device Name
IP Address
Group Owner
Network Key
Status
WPS Settings
Connect via PBC
Connect via
PIN
WLAN Settings
WLAN Defaults
WLAN Signal
Clear Settings
Print Setup
Orientation
Copies
Resolution
Clear Text
Edge Enhance
Trapping
Screen
Emulation
Select Tray
Menu overview
46
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
a. CLX-626xFW only.
b. This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type.
c. This is an optional feature.CLX-626xFW only.
d. CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW only.
Setup
(see "System setup" on page 269)
Document Box
b
(see "System setup" on page
269)
Initial Setup
Machine ID
Select Country
Language
Date&Time
Clock Mode
Default Mode
Sound/Volume
Power Save
Wakeup Event
System Timeout
Import Setting
Export Setting
Toner Status Alert
Skip Blank Pages
Job Timeout
Altitude Adjustment
Auto CR
Firmware Version
PDF Type
ImageOverwrite
Default Paper Size
CLR Empty Msg
a
Image Management
Vapor Mode
Paper Stacking
Humidity
a. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
Admin Setup
User Access Control
Authentication
Stamp
b
Item
Opacity
Position
Change Admin. Password
Firmware Upgrade
Troubleshooting
Language
b. CLX-626xFW only.
System Boxes
Stored Print
Secured Print
Shared Folder
Duplex
Select Tray
Copies
Color Mode
47
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Machine’s basic settings
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
For Windows and Mac users, see "Device Settings" on page 347.
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,
see "Device Settings" on page 347.
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings.
To change the machine’s default settings, follow these steps:
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some
models.
1
Select (Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control
panel.
Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Initial Setup on the touch
screen.
2
Select the option you want, then press OK.
Language: change the language that is displayed on the control
panel.
Date & Time: When you set the time and date, they are used in delay
fax and delay print. They are printed on reports. If, however, they are
not correct, you need to change it for the correct time being.
Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad (see
"Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290).
Month = 01 to 12
Day = 01 to 31
Year = requires four digits
Hour = 01 to 12
Minute = 00 to 59
Clock Mode: You can set your machine to display the current time
using either a 12-hour or 24-hour format.
Power Save: When you are not using the machine for a while, use
this feature to save power.
When you press the (Power/Wake Up) button, start printing, or a fax is
received, the product will wake up from the power saving mode.
Altitude Adjustment: Print quality is affected by atmospheric
pressure, which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of
the machine above sea level. Before you set the altitude value,
determine the altitude where you are (see "Altitude adjustment" on
page 287).
Machine’s basic settings
48
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
3
Select the option you want, then press OK.
4
Press OK to save the selection.
5
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine.
See "Entering various characters" on page 290.
See "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290.
See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 59.
See "Setting up the fax address book" on page 291.
49
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your
machine.
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreements.
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
cause damage to the machine.
Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.
Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page
147).
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may
lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.
3
Tray overview
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.
1 Tray extend lever
2 Paper length guide
3 Paper width guide
4 Paper width guides on a manual feeder
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x
series
CLX-626x series
2
3
1
4
2
3
1
Media and tray
50
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
For Legal-sized paper
Push button as shown and pull out the tray.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Tray overview" on
page 49).
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,
or jamming of the paper.
4
Loading paper in the tray
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
page 23).
Tray 1 / optional tray
1
Pull out the paper tray.
LGL
2
1
Media and tray
51
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
2
Squeeze and the paper width guide and paper length lever to locate
them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of the tray to
adjust to the size (see "Tray overview" on page 49).
3
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading papers.
4
After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and
paper length guide.
1 Paper length guide
2 Paper width guide
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
2
1
2
1
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
Media and tray
52
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.
If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.
Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or
the paper can be wrinkled.
5
Insert the tray back into the machine.
6
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for tray (see
"Setting the paper size and type" on page 59).
Media and tray
53
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Multi-purpose (or Manual feeder) tray
The multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray can hold special sizes and types of
print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media
specifications" on page 147).
Tips on using the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray
Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still
paper in the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray. This also applies to other
types of print media.
Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print
quality problems (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them
into the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
1
Pull out the paper tray for manual feeding.
OR
Press the push-release of multi-purpose tray and it down to open.
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
Media and tray
54
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
2
Load the paper.
3
Squeeze the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray paper width guides
and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much,
or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew.
When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline
(See "Printing on special media" on page 55).
When papers overlap when printing using Multi-purpose tray, open tray
1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing again.
4
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
panel (see "Setting the paper size and type" on page 59).
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
2
1
Media and tray
55
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
5
Printing on special media
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
paper mismatch error.
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer
Manager select (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings.
Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen, you can set it from
the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type(see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time
(see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see
"Front view" on page 23).
To see paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media specifications" on
page 147.
(: Supported, Blank: Not supported)
Types Tray 1
Optional tray
a
Manual feeder/ Multi-
purpose tray
Plain ●●
Thick ●●
Thicker ●●
Thin ●●
Bond ●●
Color ●●
CardStock ●●
Labels ●●
Transparency ●●
Envelope ●●
Preprinted ●●
Cotton ●●
Recycled ●●
Archive ●●
Letterhead ●●
Punched ●●
Glossy Photo ●●
a. CLX-626x series only.
Types Tray 1
Optional tray
a
Manual feeder/ Multi-
purpose tray
Media and tray
56
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Envelope
Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure.
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
- Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m
2
otherwise; jams may occur.
- Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not
contain air.
- Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
- Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine
during operation.
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds.
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the
corner of the envelope.
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second about 170°C (338 °F). The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the
edges of the envelope.
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
Media and tray
57
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Transparency
In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be
lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead
projector.
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in
laser printers.
Must withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long. Dust and dirt
may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged
sunlight.
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.
Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed
sheets stack up as they are being printed out.
Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox, such
as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780 (Letter).
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
Media and tray
58
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
printers.
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
- Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature
about 170°C (338°F).
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
- Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine
components.
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,
bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)
away from the edges of the material.
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
Media and tray
59
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Preprinted paper
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely
affect machine rollers.
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing
print quality.
Glossy Photo
Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4/Letter) for this machine by HP
Professional Laser Paper 150.
6
Setting the paper size and type
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the
control panel buttons.
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
paper mismatch error.
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer
Manager select (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings.
Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen, you can set it from
the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
AAAAA
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-626x series
Media and tray
60
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
You can set the paper size and type from Device Settings in Samsung
Easy Printer Manager program.
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,
see "Device Settings" on page 347.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
1
Select (Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or
Paper Type on the control panel.
Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Paper Setup > select a tray >
Paper Size or Paper Type on the touch screen.
2
Select the tray and the option you want.
3
Press OK to save the selection.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the Paper
tab > Size > Edit... and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the Printing
Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
7
Using the output support
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number
of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not
allow children near it.
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help
the printed pages to align. Unfold the output support.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
page 23).
Media and tray
61
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
8
Preparing originals
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper
jam, low print quality and machine damage.
- Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
- Coated paper
- Onion skin or thin paper
- Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other
unusual characteristics.
9
Loading originals
You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for
copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
page 23).
On the scanner glass
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best
scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. Make sure that no
originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document
feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
Media and tray
62
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
1
Lift and open the scanner lid.
2
Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
3
Close the scanner lid.
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and
toner consumption.
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always
keep it clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner
lid open.
Media and tray
63
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall
on your hands and get hurt.
Do not look into the light from inside of the scanner while copying or
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.
In the document feeder
Using the document feeder (or duplex automatic document feeder (DADF)), you
can load up to 50 sheets of paper (80 g/m
2
, 21 lbs bond) for one job.
1
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
2
Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure
that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on
the document input tray.
Media and tray
64
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
3
Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout.
Always keep the glass clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
65
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using
advanced print features" on page 298).
10
Printing
If you are a Mac, Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
Advanced Guide (see "Mac printing" on page 307, "Linux printing" on page
309 or "Unix printing" on page 311).
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
Select Print from the File menu.
3
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
4
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 67).
5
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
Basic printing
66
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
11
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
( ) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing (Cancel or Stop/Clear)
button on the control panel.
Basic printing
67
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
12
Opening printing preferences
The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may
differ depending on the machine in use.
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a
warning mark or . An mark means you can select that certain
option but it is not recommended, and an mark means you cannot
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
3
Select your machine from the Select Printer.
4
Click Properties or Preferences.
The screenshot may differ depending on model.
Basic printing
68
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
•You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
"Easy Eco Driver" on page 339).
You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status
button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 348).
Using a favorite setting
The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the
Favorites and Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for
future use.
To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:
1
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
3
Click Save.
4
Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon.
5
Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.
To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set
to print according to the settings you have selected.
To delete saved settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete.
13
Using help
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and
press F1 on your keyboard.
Basic printing
69
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
14
Eco printing
The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco function
allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing.
If you press the Eco button from the control panel, eco mode is enabled. The
default setting of Eco mode is duplex (CLX-626x series only), Multiple Pages per
Side (2-up), Skip Blank Pages.
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy
Printer Manager program.
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see
"Device Settings" on page 347.
Setting Eco mode on the control panel
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
1
Select (Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings on
the control panel.
Or press Eco on the control panel.
Or select Eco > Settings > Next on the touch screen.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the eco mode.
- Off: Set the eco mode off.
- On: Set the eco mode on.
If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web
Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or
Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the On force
message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode
status.
Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru™ Web Service
or Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Before you select this item, you
must set the eco function in SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco).
- Select Template
Default Eco: The machine is set to Default Eco mode.
Custom Eco: Change any necessary values.
3
Press OK to save the selection.
Basic printing
70
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Setting eco mode on the driver
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 67).
Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image ( ), that
means the eco mode is currently enabled.
Eco options
Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel.
None: Disables Eco mode.
Eco Printing: Enables eco mode. Activate the various Eco items you want to
use.
Password: If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode, you have to
enter the password to change the status.
Password button: You can set from SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy Printer
Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the password button is activated. To
change the print settings, click on this button, enter the password or need
to contact the administrator.
Result simulator
Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used
electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you
selected.
The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled.
Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA,
the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and
www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index.
The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing
power consumption of this machine.
The actual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may
differ depending on the operating system used, computing performance,
application software, connection method, media type [thickness], media
size, job complexity, etc.
Basic printing
71
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
15
Secure printing
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
You might not be able to print a complex document using the RAM Disk.
Install an optional memory to print a complex document.
When you use a printing device in an office, school or other public place, you can
protect your personal documents or confidential information by using the
secure printing feature.
Starting secure printing from the SyncThru™ Web
Service
1
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
Click Login on the upper right of SyncThru™ Web Service website (see
"Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 340).
3
Settings > Machine Settings > System > RAM Disk.
4
Enable RAM Disk.
This features may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Printing secure documents from the control panel
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on
page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
1
Select (Menu) > Job Management > Secured Job on the control
panel.
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select (Document Box) > System
Boxes > Next > Secured Print on the touch screen.
2
Select the document to print.
3
Enter the password that you set from the printer driver.
4
Print or delete the document.
72
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Copy" on
page 253).
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
16
Basic copy
1
Select (copy) > (Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Or select (Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Or select Copy > Basic Copy > (settings) on the touch screen.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge,
Darkness, Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons
(see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 72).
4
Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if
necessary.
5
Press (Start).
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press (Stop
or Stop/Clear) button and the copying will stop.
17
Changing the settings for each copy
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and
easily make a copy.
If you press the (Stop or Stop/Clear) button twice while setting the
copy options, all of the options you have set for the current copy job will
be canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will
automatically return to their default status after the machine completes
the copy in progress.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Basic copying
73
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Darkness
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust
the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
1
Select (copy) > (Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the
control panel.
Or press Darkness on the control panel.
Or select Copy > Basic Copy > (settings) >Darkness on the touch
screen.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the
darkest.
3
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Original Type
The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document for the current copy job.
1
Select (copy) > (Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the
control panel.
Or select (Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the control
panel.
Or select Copy > Basic Copy > (settings) > Original Type on the
touch screen.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts.
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines.
3
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Basic copying
74
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Reduced or enlarged copy
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% from the
document feeder or scanner glass.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 10).
If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not
available.
To select from the predefined copy sizes
1
Select (copy) > (Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on
the control panel.
Or select (Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on the control
panel.
Or select Copy > Custom Copy > (settings) > Reduce/Enlarge on
the touch screen.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
3
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate
1
Select (copy) > (Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge >
Custom on the control panel.
Or select (Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge> Custom on
the control panel.
Or select Copy > Custom Copy > (settings) > Reduce/Enlarge >
Custom on the touch screen.
2
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad.
3
Press OK to save the selection.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
Basic copying
75
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
18
ID card copying
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available.
Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
1
Press ID Copy on the control panel.
Or select (Menu) > Copy Feature > Layout > ID Copy on the control
panel.
Or select Copy > ID Copy on the touch screen.
2
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
3
Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display.
4
Press (Start).
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side
and Press [Start].
5
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
Basic copying
76
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
6
Press (Start) button.
If you do not press the (Start) button, only the front side will be
copied.
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be
printed.
77
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic scanning
For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan
features" on page 313).
19
Basic Scanning
This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals.
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
If you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page 314).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select (scan) > Scan To PC on the control panel.
Or select Scan > Local PC on the touch screen.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection, or select
Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
3
Select the scan destination you want and press OK.
Default setting is My Documents.
You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list. Also
you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different
path.
•To change the Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Switch to
advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
4
Select the option you want and press OK.
5
Scanning begins.
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
78
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/C145xN/CLX-626xND (see
"Variety feature" on page 10).
For special faxing features, see "Fax features" on page 322.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more
information ask your internet service provider.
We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public
Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use
a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can
improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter
eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or
Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the
machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro-
filter.
1 Line port
2 Micro filter
3 DSL modem / Telephone line
(see "Rear view" on page 25).
20
Preparing to fax
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to
your telephone wall jack (see "Rear view" on page 25). Refer to the Quick
Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a
telephone connection is different from one country to another.
21
Sending a fax
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or
the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document feeder
and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the document
feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select (fax) on the control panel.
Or select Fax > Memory Send > (settings) on the touch screen.
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 80).
Basic faxing
79
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
4
Enter the destination fax number (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on
page 290).
5
Press (Start) on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and
send the fax to the destinations.
If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung
Network PC Fax (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page 323).
When you want to cancel a fax job, press (Stop or Stop/Clear)
button before the machine starts transmission.
If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to
place another page.
Sending a fax manually
Perform the following to send a fax using (On Hook Dial) on the control
panel.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select (fax) on the control panel.
Or select Fax > On Hook Dial > (settings) on the touch screen.
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 80).
4
Press (On Hook Dial) on the control panel or lift the handset.
5
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
6
Press (Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax
signal from the remote fax machine.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple
locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote
station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory.
You cannot send faxes with this feature if you have chosen super fine as an
option or if the fax is in color.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select (fax) on the control panel.
Or select Fax > SpeedDial Send or Group Dial Send > (settings) on
the touch screen.
Basic faxing
80
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 80).
4
Select (Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control panel.
Or select Next on the touch screen.
5
Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using
the (Address book) button.
6
Enter the second fax number and press OK.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
7
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
steps 5 and 6.
You can add up to 10 destinations.
Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial number.
8
When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another
No.? prompt and press OK.
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the
order in which you entered them.
Multi send report is printed after sending faxes.
22
Receiving a fax
Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the
machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically
receives the fax.
23
Adjusting the document settings
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your original’s
status to get the best quality.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Resolution
The default document settings produce good results when using typical text-
based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality
fax.
Basic faxing
81
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
default setting (see Advanced Guide).
1
Select (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the control
panel.
Or select Fax > select a fax such as Memory Send, On Hook Dial,
Delayed Send, or etc. > (settings) > Resolution on the touch screen.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
Standard: Originals with normal sized characters.
Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are
communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.
When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine
with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine
resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode
supported by the other fax machine.
Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.
Color Fax: Original with colors.
Memory transmission is not available in this mode.
You can only send a color fax if the machine you are communicating with
supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually.
3
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default
setting (see "Fax" on page 259).
1
Select (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the control
panel.
Or select Fax > select a fax such as Memory Send, On Hook Dial,
Delayed Send, or etc. > (settings) > Darkness on the touch screen.
2
Select a darkness level you want.
3
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
82
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
24
About USB memory
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give
you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and
videos, high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or
move.
You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device.
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device
Print data stored on a USB memory device
Restore backup files to the machine’s memory
Format the USB memory device
Check the available memory space
25
Plugging in a USB memory device
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1.1 and
USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory devices with
FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector.
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.
Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.
Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation
or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does
not cover damage caused by user’s misuse.
If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings
and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it.
For details about these features, see the user’s guide of the USB memory
device.
A B
Using USB memory device
83
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
26
Scanning to a USB memory device
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory
device.
Scanning
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
Select (scan) > Scan To USB > OK on the control panel.
Or select Scan > USB > Next > Start on the touch screen.
The machine begins scanning.
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from the
machine.
Customizing Scan to USB
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to USB
job.
1
Select (scan) > (Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the
control panel.
Or select Scan to > (Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the
control panel.
Or select Direct USB > Scan to USB > (settings) on the touch screen.
Using USB memory device
84
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
2
Select the setting option you want appears.
Original Size: Sets the image size.
Original Type: Sets the original document’s.
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
Color Mode: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,
you cannot select JPEG in File Format.
File Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.
If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in Color
Mode.
Duplex: Sets the duplex mode.
Darkness: Sets the brightness level to scan an original.
File Name: Sets the file name.
File Policy: Sets the policy to save files between overwirting or
renaming
PDF Encryption: Sets the encrypts PDF files.
3
Select the desired status you want and press OK.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options.
5
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
You can change the default scan settings. Refer to the Advanced Guide.
27
Printing from a USB memory device
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.
File is supported by Direct Print option.
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible.
If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be
different.
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
JPEG: JPEG Baseline
PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version.
To print a document from a USB memory device
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
2
Select USB Print.
Using USB memory device
85
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
3
Select the folder or file you want and press OK.
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more
files or folders in the selected folder.
4
Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number.
5
Press OK, Start or Print to start printing the selected file.
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.
6
Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2.
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.
7
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
28
Backing up data
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure
or storage failure. Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them
as backup files on a USB memory device.
Backing up data
1
Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2
Select (Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Export Setting
on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Export
Setting on the touch screen.
3
Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK.
The data is backed up to the USB memory.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Using USB memory device
86
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Restoring data
1
Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to
the USB memory port.
2
Select (Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Import Setting
on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Import
Setting on the touch screen.
3
Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK.
4
Select the file you want to restore and press OK.
5
Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.
6
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
29
Managing USB memory
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at
once by reformatting the device.
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files
or folders in the selected folder.
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot be
restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data before
deleting it.
Deleting an image file
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a
file > (settings) > Delete on the touch screen.
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
2
Select File Manage > Delete and press OK.
Using USB memory device
87
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
3
Select the file you want to delete and press OK.
4
Select Yes.
5
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Formatting a USB memory device
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a
file > (settings) > Format on the touch screen.
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
2
Select File Manage > Format and press OK.
3
Select Yes.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Viewing the USB memory status
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving
documents.
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > Show Space > Next on the
touch screen.
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
2
Select Check Space.
3
The available memory space appears on the display.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
3. Maintenance
This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your
machine.
Ordering supplies and accessories 89
Available consumables 90
Available accessories 92
Available maintenance parts 93
Storing the toner cartridge 94
Redistributing toner 96
Replacing the toner cartridge 98
Replacing the waste toner container 101
Installing accessories 103
Monitoring the supplies life 107
Setting the toner low alert 108
Cleaning the machine 109
Tips for moving & storing your machine 115
89
3. Maintenance
Ordering supplies and accessories
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.
90
3. Maintenance
Available consumables
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the followings of supplies for your machine:
Type Model
Average yield
a
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size.
Part name
Toner
cartridge
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
Average continuous black cartridge yield: Approx. 2,500 standard pages (Black)
Average continuous color cartridge yield: Approx. 1,800 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
CLT-K504S: Black
CLT-Y504S: Yellow
CLT-M504S: Magenta
CLT-C504S: Cyan
CLX-626x series Average continuous black cartridge yield: Approx. 2,000 standard pages (Black)
Average continuous color cartridge yield: Approx. 1,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
CLT-K506S: Black
CLT-Y506S: Yellow
CLT-M506S: Magenta
CLT-C506S: Cyan
Average continuous black cartridge yield: Approx. 6,000 standard pages (Black)
Average continuous color cartridge yield: Approx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
CLT-K506L: Black
CLT-Y506L: Yellow
CLT-M506L: Magenta
CLT-C506L: Cyan
Waste toner
container
CLX-419x series
C145x series
C186x series
Approx. 14,000 standard pages (Black)
Approx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)
CLT-W504
CLX-626x series CLT-W506
Available consumables
91
3. Maintenance
Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used,
the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be
purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise,
new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your
machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other
supplies according to the specific country conditions.
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot
guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair
required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not
be covered under the machine’s warranty.
92
3. Maintenance
Available accessories
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Accessory Function Part name
Memory module Extends your machine’s memory capacity. CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: ML-MEM370 (512 MB)
CLX-626x series: ML-MEM380 (1,024 MB)
Optional tray If you are experiencing frequent paper supply
problems, you can attach an additional 520
a
sheet tray.
a. Plain paper 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond).
CLX-626x series: CLP-S680A
93
3. Maintenance
Available maintenance parts
You need to replace the maintenance parts at specific intervals to keep the machine in the best condition and avoid print quality and paper feeding problems
resulting from the worn-out parts. Maintenance parts are mostly rollers, belts and pads. However, the replacement period and parts may differ depending on the
model. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. To purchase
maintenance parts, contact the retailer where you bought the machine. The replacement period for the maintenance parts is informed by the Samsung Printer Status
program. Or if your machine supports display screen, a message is displayed in the display screen. The replacement period varies based on the operating system
used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, paper type, paper size, and job complexity.
94
3. Maintenance
Storing the toner cartridge
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature
and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to
ensure optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new
Samsung toner cartridge.
Store the cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used.
This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner
cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation
– if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge
with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf
and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed
from the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge
properly.
Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package.
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it
were installed in the machine.
Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:
- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
- Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%.
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
- Direct sunlight or room light.
- Dusty places.
- A car for a long period of time.
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.
- An environment with salty air.
1
Handling instructions
Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge.
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can
cause internal damage and toner spillage.
2
Toner cartridge usage
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung
brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or
remanufactured toner cartridges.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused
by the use of refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner
cartridges.
Storing the toner cartridge
95
3. Maintenance
3
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary
depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or
media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the
toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
96
3. Maintenance
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density varies from side to side.
The Status LED blinks red. The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display.
The computer’s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is low on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer
Status" on page 348).
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still
occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Redistributing toner
97
3. Maintenance
98
3. Maintenance
Replacing the toner cartridge
For CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series:
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.
For CLX-626x series:
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).
The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicate when each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.
The computer’s Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is empty on toner (see "Using Samsung
Printer Status" on page 348).
Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 90).
Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Replacing the toner cartridge
99
3. Maintenance
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Replacing the toner cartridge
100
3. Maintenance
101
3. Maintenance
Replacing the waste toner container
When the life span of the waste toner container has expired, waste toner container-related message appears on the screen display of the control panel, indicating
the waste toner container needs to be replaced. Check the waste toner container for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 90).
Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality problems
occur.
When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands.
Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill.
Replacing the waste toner container
102
3. Maintenance
Do not tilt or turn over the container.
1
2
1
2
1
2
103
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
4
Precautions
Disconnect the power cord
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power
cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.
Discharge static electricity
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service
component. Do not change it by yourself. There is a risk of an explosion if
battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to
the instructions.
5
Setting Device Options
When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
in Device Options.
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Settings.
2
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows 8, search for Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3
Right-click your machine.
4
For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7, For Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2, from
context menus, select the Printer properties.
Installing accessories
104
3. Maintenance
If Printer properties item has mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with selected printer.
5
Select Device Options.
The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating
system you are using.
6
Select the appropriate option.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select
the tray.
Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this
feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode.
Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job.
Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF
Spooling.
Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account
identification information with each document you print.
- User permission: If you check this option, only users with user
permission can start a print job.
- Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with
group permission can start a print job.
If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting
Password Encryption.
Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size.
7
Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window.
Installing accessories
105
3. Maintenance
6
Upgrading a memory module
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory module slot to install additional memory. We recommend the use of only genuine
Samsung DIMM's. You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM's.
The order information is provided for optional accessories (see "Available accessories" on page 92).
After installing the optional memory, you can use the advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer
properties window. You can control the active job queue and file policy in Job Manage. menu (see "Using optional device features" on page 332).
1
2
1
2
Installing accessories
106
3. Maintenance
1
2
1
2
107
3. Maintenance
Monitoring the supplies life
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if
necessary.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36).
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
1
Select (Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Report > Supplies Information on the touch screen.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
3
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready mode.
108
3. Maintenance
Setting the toner low alert
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether or not
this message or LED appears.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see "Device Settings" on
page 347.
1
Select (Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > TonerLow Alert on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Toner Status Alert on the touch screen.
On the touch screen model, you can set the toner's Warning Level for the toner low error in the Toner Status Alert option. Warning Level means the remaining
amount of toner (%) in the toner cartridge.
2
Select the option you want.
3
Press OK to save the selection.
109
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing
condition and use your machine longer.
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the
cabinet.
If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.
7
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.
Cleaning the machine
110
3. Maintenance
8
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks
or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such
as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine.
Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
Cleaning the machine
111
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
112
3. Maintenance
9
Cleaning the pickup roller
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
Cleaning the machine
113
3. Maintenance
10
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed.
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
1
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2
Lift and open the scanner lid.
Cleaning the machine
114
3. Maintenance
3
Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry.
1 Scanner lid
2 Scanner glass
3 Document feeder glass
4 White bar
4
Close the scanner lid.
1
2
3
4
115
3. Maintenance
Tips for moving & storing your machine
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to
the machine or reduce print quality.
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.
4. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
Tips for avoiding paper jams 117
Clearing original document jams 118
Clearing paper jams 123
Understanding the status LED 135
Understanding display messages 137
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine
has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error.
If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting
chapter in the Advanced Guide (see "Troubleshooting" on page 357).
If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service.
117
4. Troubleshooting
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct medias, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 49).
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
Do not mix paper type and size in a tray.
Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
118
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing original document jams
When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning message appears on the display.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper- originals.
Clearing original document jams
119
4. Troubleshooting
1
Original paper jam in front of scanner
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
Clearing original document jams
120
4. Troubleshooting
2
Original paper jam inside of scanner
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
Clearing original document jams
121
4. Troubleshooting
3
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 23).
1
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.
2
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.
Clearing original document jams
122
4. Troubleshooting
4
Original paper jam in scanner duplex path
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW only.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 23).
2
1
123
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.
5
In tray1
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
Clearing paper jams
124
4. Troubleshooting
6
In optional tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
CLX-626x series only.
Clearing paper jams
125
4. Troubleshooting
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
Clearing paper jams
126
4. Troubleshooting
7
In the manual feeder/multi-purpose tray
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
Clearing paper jams
127
4. Troubleshooting
CLX-626x series
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
Clearing paper jams
128
4. Troubleshooting
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
1
2
3
Clearing paper jams
129
4. Troubleshooting
8
Inside the machine
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
Clearing paper jams
130
4. Troubleshooting
9
In the exit area
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
Clearing paper jams
131
4. Troubleshooting
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
Clearing paper jams
132
4. Troubleshooting
CLX-626x series
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
Clearing paper jams
133
4. Troubleshooting
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
Clearing paper jams
134
4. Troubleshooting
10
In the duplex unit area
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
CLX-626x series only.
135
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding the status LED
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.
Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 26).
To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part (see "Understanding display messages" on page 137).
You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computer’s Samsung Printing Status window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 348).
If the problem persists, call a service representative.
LED Status Description
Status
Off The machine is off-line.
Green
Blinking When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data.
On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Red
Blinking
A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem
is cleared, the machine resumes.
Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life
a
of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for
replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page
96).
b
On
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life
a
. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
The cover is opened. Close the cover.
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on page 137).
A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 123).
Understanding the status LED
136
4. Troubleshooting
Wireless
b
Blue
Blinking The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
On
The machine is connected to a wireless network (see "Wireless network setup" on page 195).
Off The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.
()
Power/
WakeUp
Blue
On The machine is in power save mode.
Off
The machine is in ready mode or machine’s power is off.
Eco Green
On Eco mode is on (see "Eco printing" on page 69).
Off Eco mode is off.
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages
may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is
on and the printer stops printing.
b. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 26).
LED Status Description
137
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status
or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.
You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computer’s
Printing Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
page 348).
If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job
again. If the problem persists, call a service representative.
When you call for service, provide the service representative with the
contents of display message.
Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the
options or models.
[error number] indicates the error number.
[tray type] indicates the tray number.
[media type] indicates the media type.
[media size] indicates the media size.
[color] indicates the color of toner.
[unit type] indicates the unit type.
11
Paper Jam-related messages
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Original paper jam
inside of scanner.
Remove jam
Original paper jam
in front of scanner.
Remove jam
The loaded original
document has
jammed in
document feeder.
Clear the jam (see "Clearing
original document jams" on
page 118).
Paper Jam
in Tray1
Paper has jammed
in the tray.
Clear the jam (see "In tray1" on
page 123).
Paper Jam
in Tray2
Paper has jammed
in the optional tray.
Clear the jam (see "In optional
tray" on page 124).
Paper Jam
in MP Tray
Paper has jammed
in the multi-purpose
tray.
Clear the jam (see "In the
manual feeder/multi-purpose
tray" on page 126).
Jam inside machine Paper has jammed
inside the machine.
Clear the jam (see "Inside the
machine" on page 129).
Jam inside of duplex Paper has jammed
inside the duplex
area.
Clear the jam (see "In the
duplex unit area" on page 134).
Jam in exit area Paper has jammed
in the paper exit
area.
Clear the jam (see "In the exit
area" on page 130).
Understanding display messages
138
4. Troubleshooting
12
Toner-related messages
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Error [error
number]
Toner Failure:
[error number]
[color]
Install [color]
toner again
[color] toner
not installed
Install [color]
toner
cartridge
A toner cartridge is
not installed.
Reinstall the toner cartridge.
A toner cartridge is
not being detected
Reinstall the toner cartridge two or
three times to confirm it is seated
properly. If the problem persists,
contact the service representatives.
Protective film is
not removed from
toner.
Remove the protective film from the
toner cartridge. Refer to Quick
Installation Guide provided with your
machine.
•[color]toner
Not
compatible
[color] toner
cartridge is
not
compatible.
Check guide
The indicated toner
cartridge is not
suitable for your
machine.
Install the corresponding toner
cartridge with a Samsung-genuine
cartridge (see "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 98).
Prepare new
[color] toner
Prepare new
[color] toner
cartridge
Small amount of
toner is left in the
indicated cartridge.
The estimated
cartridge life of
toner is close.
Prepare a new cartridge for a
replacement. You may temporarily
increase the printing quality by
redistributing the toner (see
"Redistributing toner" on page 96).
Replace new
[color] toner
Replace with
new [color]
toner
cartridge
The indicated toner
cartridge has
almost reached its
estimated
cartridge life
a
.
You can choose Stop or Continue
as shown on the control panel. If
you select Stop, the printer stops
printing. If you select Continue,
the printer keeps printing but the
printing quality cannot be
guaranteed.
Replace the toner cartridge for the
best print quality when this
message appears. Using a
cartridge beyond this stage can
result in printing quality issues (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 98).
The indicated toner
cartridge has
reached its
estimated
cartridge life
a
.
Replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 98).
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Understanding display messages
139
4. Troubleshooting
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a
non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required
as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be
covered under the machine warranty.
13
Tray-related messages
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates
the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798 (see "Available
consumables" on page 90). The number of pages may be affected by operating environment,
percentage of image area, printing interval, media, percentage of image area, and media size.
Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears
and the machine stops printing.
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Output bin full
Output bin full. Remove
printed paper
The output tray is full. Remove papers from the
output tray, the printer
resumes printing.
Paper jam or
empty in tray
Paper has jammed
in the paper feed
area.
There is no paper in
tray.
Clear the jam (see
"CLX-419x series/
C145x series/C186x
series" on page 126).
Load paper in tray
(see "Multi-purpose
(or Manual feeder)
tray" on page 53).
Paper Empty in tray 1
Paper is empty in tray 1.
Load paper
There is no paper in
tray 1.
Load paper in tray 1 (see
"Tray 1 / optional tray"
on page 50).
Paper Empty in tray 2
Paper is empty in tray 2.
Load paper
There is no paper in
tray 2.
Load paper in tray 2 (see
"Tray 1 / optional tray"
on page 50).
Paper Empty in MP
Paper is empty in MP
tray.
Load paper
There is no paper in
the multi-purpose tray.
Load paper in the multi-
purpose tray (see "Multi-
purpose (or Manual
feeder) tray" on page
53).
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Understanding display messages
140
4. Troubleshooting
14
Network-related messages
15
Misc. messages
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
IP Conflict
This IP address
conflicts with that of
other system
The network IP address
you have set is being
used by someone else.
Check the IP address
and reset it if necessary
(see Advanced Guide).
802.1x Network Error
802.1x Network Error
Contact the Admin.
Fail to authenticate. Check the network
authentication
protocol. If the problem
persists, contact your
network administrator.
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Adjusting Color
Registration...
The machine is adjusting
the color registration.
Wait a few minutes.
Calibrating image
density…
The machine is
calibrating the image
density.
Wait a few minutes.
Door is open.
Close it
The front cover or rear
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
Scanner door open
Door of scanner is
open.
Close the door
The document feeder
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
Error: [error number]
Actuator [unit type]
Failure: [error number]
Call for service
Error: [error number]
[unit type] Failure: [error
number] Turn off then
on. Call for service if the
problem persists.
Error: [error number]
[unit type] Unit Failure:
[error number] Please
turn off then on
The machine unit cannot
be controlled.
Reboot the power and
try the printing job
again. If the problem
persists, please call for
service.
Not Proper room temp
Not Proper room
temperature.
Change room
temperature
The machine is in a room
with improper room
temperature.
Move the machine to a
room with proper
room temperature (see
"Specifications" on
page 144).
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Understanding display messages
141
4. Troubleshooting
Prepare TR. belt
Prepare new image
transfer belt unit
The life of the transfer
belt has expired.
Replace the transfer
belt with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
Replace Fuser uint
Replace with new fuser
uint
The life of the fuser unit
will be expired.
Replace the fuser unit
with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
Install TR. belt unit
Install image transfer
belt unit
The transfer belt is not
installed.
Install a Samsung-
genuine transfer belt.
Contact the service
representatives.
TR. belt Not compatible
Image transfer belt unit
is not compatible.
Check guide
The transfer belt of the
machine is not for your
machine.
Install the a Samsung-
genuine part designed
for your machine.
Contact the service
representatives.
Waste toner Full
Waste toner container
is almost full.
Replace with new one
The life span of the waste
toner container has
expired and the printer
will stop printing until a
new waste toner
container is placed into
the printer.
Replace a waste toner
container with a
Samsung-genuine
waste toner container.
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Waste Not Installed
Waste toner tank is not
installed. install it
The waste toner
container is not installed.
Install the waste toner
container. If it is
already installed, try to
reinstall the waste
toner container. If the
problem persists, call
for service.
Replace pickup roller
Replace with new [tray
type] pickup roller
The life of the tray1, tray2
or MP tray pick-up roller
will expired soon.
Replace the tray pick-
up roller with a new
one. Contact the
service
representatives.
Replace retard roller
End of life, Replace with
new [tray type] retard
roller
The life of the tray1 or
tray2 retard roller has
expired.
Replace the tray retard
roller with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
Memory Full
Fax memory is full.
Print or remove
received fax job
The memory is full. No
more fax data can be
received.
Print or remove the
received fax data in the
memory.
Scanner Locked
Scanner locking switch
is locked. Pull Blue
Latch towards you.
The scanner is locked. Reboot the power. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Understanding display messages
142
4. Troubleshooting
Error: [error number]
Fax System Failure:
[error number] Install
fax modem card again
There is a problem in the
fax system.
Install the fax card. If it
is already installed, try
to reinstall the fax card.
If the problem persists,
call for service.
Error: [error number]
UI System Failure:
[error number] Call for
service
There is a problem in the
UI system.
Unplug the power
cord and plug it back
in. If the problem
persists, call for service.
Error: [error number]
EngineSystem Failure:
[error number] Call for
service
There is a problem in the
engine system.
Unplug the power
cord and plug it back
in. If the problem
persists, call for service.
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
5. Appendix
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.
Specifications 144
Regulatory information 157
Copyright 170
144
5. Appendix
Specifications
1
General specifications
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.
Items Description
Dimension
a
Width x Length x Height CLX-419x series /C145x series/C186x series: 448 x 417 x 423 mm (17.64 x 16.42 x 16.65 inches)
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD: 420 x 452.5 x 476.8 mm (16.54 x 17.81 x 18.77 inches)
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW: 469 x 452.5 x 504.3 mm (18.46 x 17.81 x 19.85 inches)
Weight
a
Machine with consumables CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: 21.44 Kg (47.27 Ibs)
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD: 24.8 Kg (54.68 Ibs)
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW: 26.7 Kg (58.86 Ibs)
Specifications
145
5. Appendix
Noise Level
bc
Ready mode Less than 32 dB (A)
Print mode CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 50 dB (A)
CLX-626x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
Copy mode Scanner glass CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
CLX-626x series: Less than 54 dB (A)
Document feeder CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD: Less than 54 dB (A)
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW: Less than 54 dB (A)
Scan mode Scanner glass CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
CLX-626x series: Less than 54 dB (A)
Document feeder CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD: Less than 54 dB (A)
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW: Less than 54 dB (A)
Temperature Operation 10 to 30 °C (50 to 86 °F)
Storage (packed) -20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104 °F)
Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH
Storage (packed) 10 to 90% RH
Power rating
d
110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V
Items Description
Specifications
146
5. Appendix
Power
consumption
e
Average operating mode CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 380 W
CLX-626x series: Less than 450 W
Ready mode CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 50 W
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR: Less than 16 W
CLX-626xFW: Less than 18 W
Power save mode CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/C145xN: Less than 1.0 W
CLX-419xFW/C145x FW/C186xFW: Less than 3.6 W (Wi-Fi Direct off: Less than 2.4W)
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR: Less than 1.0 W
CLX-626xFW: Less than 2.4 W
Power off mode
f
Less than 0.1 W
Network Standby Mode (All
Port Activation)
CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xN/C145xN: Less than 3.75 W
C186xFW: Less than 4.89 W
CLX-626xFD: Less than 2.22 W
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xND: Less than 3.02 W
CLX-626xFW: Less than 3.4 W
Wireless
g
Module SPW-B4319U
a. Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset.
b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
c. China only: If the equipment's noise is louder than 63 db (A) ,the equipment should be placed in region of relatively independent advice.
d. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.
e. The power consumption may be affected by the machine’s status, setting conditions, operating environment, and measuring equipment and method the country uses.
f. Power consumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected.
g. Wireless models only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Items Description
Specifications
147
5. Appendix
2
Print media specifications
Type Size Dimensions
Weight/Capacity
a
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series CLX-626x series
Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1/ Optional tray Multi-purpose tray
Plain paper
bc
Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
70 to 89 g/m
2
(19 to
24 lbs bond)
250 sheets of 80 g/
m
2
(21 lbs bond)
70 to 89 g/m
2
(19 to
24 lbs bond)
1 sheet
70 to 90 g/m
2
(19 to
24 lbs bond)
Tray1: 250 sheets of
80 g/m
2
(21 lbs bond)
Optional tray: 520
sheets of 80 g/m
2
(20 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m
2
(19 to
24 lbs bond)
50 sheets
Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)
70 to 89 g/m
2
(19 to
24 lbs bond)
150 sheets of 80 g/
m
2
(21 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m
2
(19 to
24 lbs bond)
150 sheets of 80 g/m
2
(21 lbs bond)
Not available in optional
tray.
Specifications
148
5. Appendix
Envelope Envelope
Monarch
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to
24 lbs bond)
20 sheets
75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to
24 lbs bond)
1 sheet
75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to
24 lbs bond)
20 sheets
Not available in optional
tray.
75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to
24 lbs bond)
5 sheets
Envelope
No. 10
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope
No. 9
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)
Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches)
Thick paper
bc
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
90 to 104 g/m
2
(24 to
28 lbs bond)
50 sheets of 105 g/
m
2
(28 lbs bond)
90 to 104 g/m
2
(24
to 28 lbs bond)
1 sheet
91 to 105 g/m
2
(24 to 28
lbs bond)
50 sheets of 105 g/m
2
(28 lbs bond)
91 to 105 g/m
2
(24 to
28 lbs bond)
10 sheets
Thicker
paper
bc
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
164 to 220 g/m
2
(43 to
59 lbs bond)
50 sheets of 220 g/
m
2
(59 lbs bond)
164 to 220 g/m
2
(43
to 59 lbs bond)
1 sheet
164 to 220 g/m
2
(43 to 59
lbs bond)
50 sheets of 220 g/m
2
(59 lbs bond)
Not available in optional
tray.
164 to 220 g/m
2
(43 to
59 lbs bond)
10 sheets)
Type Size Dimensions
Weight/Capacity
a
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series CLX-626x series
Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1/ Optional tray Multi-purpose tray
Specifications
149
5. Appendix
Thin paper Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
60 to 69 g/m
2
(16 to 19
lbs bond)
250 sheets of 70 g/
m
2
(19 lbs bond)
60 to 69 g/m
2
(16 to
19 lbs bond)
1 sheet
60 to 70 g/m
2
(16 to 19
lbs bond)
250 sheets of 70 g/m
2
(19 lbs bond)
60 to 70 g/m
2
(16 to 19
lbs bond)
50 sheets
Cotton, Color,
Pre-printed
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to 24
lbs bond)
250 sheets of 80 g/
m
2
(21 lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to
24 lbs bond)
1 sheet
75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to 24
lbs bond)
250 sheets of 80 g/m
2
(21 lbs bond)
Not available in optional
tray.
75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to 24
lbs bond)
50 sheets
Recycled Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
70 to 90 g/m
2
(19 to 24
lbs bond)
250 sheets of 80 g/
m
2
(21 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m
2
(19 to
24 lbs bond)
1 sheet
70 to 90 g/m
2
(19 to 24
lbs bond)
250 sheets of 80 g/m
2
(21 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m
2
(19 to 24
lbs bond)
50 sheets
Transparency Letter,
Legal, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section
138 to 146 g/m
2
(35 to
39 lbs bond)
50 sheets
138 to 146 g/m
2
(35
to 39 lbs bond)
1 sheet
138 to 146 g/m
2
(35 to 39
lbs bond)
50 sheets
Not available in optional
tray.
138 to 146 g/m
2
(35 to
39 lbs bond)
10 sheets
Type Size Dimensions
Weight/Capacity
a
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series CLX-626x series
Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1/ Optional tray Multi-purpose tray
Specifications
150
5. Appendix
Labels
d
Letter,
Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS
B5, ISO B5,
Executive,
A5
Refer to the Plain paper section
120 to 150 g/m
2
(32 to
40 lbs bond)
50 sheets
120 to 150 g/m
2
(32
to 40 lbs bond)
1 sheet
120 to 150 g/m
2
(32 to 40
lbs bond)
50 sheets
Not available in optional
tray.
120 to 150 g/m
2
(32 to
40 lbs bond)
10 sheets
Card stock
bc
Letter,
Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS
B5, ISO B5,
Executive,
A5
Refer to the Plain paper section
121 to 163 g/m
2
(32 to
43 lbs bond)
50 sheets
121 to 163 g/m
2
(32
to 43 lbs bond)
1 sheet
121 to 163 g/m
2
(32 to 43
lbs bond)
50 sheets
121 to 163 g/m
2
(32 to
43 lbs bond)
10 sheets
Bond paper Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
105 to 120 g/m
2
(28 to
32 lbs bond)
50 sheets
105 to 120 g/m
2
(28
to 32 lbs bond)
1 sheet
105 to 120 g/m
2
(28 to 32
lbs bond)
50 sheets
105 to 120 g/m
2
(28 to
32 lbs bond)
10 sheets
Archive,
Punched
paper,
Letterhead
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section 250 sheets 1 sheet 250 sheets 50 sheets
Type Size Dimensions
Weight/Capacity
a
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series CLX-626x series
Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1/ Optional tray Multi-purpose tray
Specifications
151
5. Appendix
Glossy Photo
b
Letter, A4,
Postcard 4x6
Refer to the Plain paper section
111 to 130 g/m
2
(30 to
35 lbs bond)
30 sheets
111 to 130 g/m
2
(30
to 35 lbs bond)
1 sheet
111 to 130 g/m
2
(30 to 35
lbs bond) for tray1
Tray1: 30 sheets
Optional tray: 50
sheets
111 to 130 g/m
2
(30 to
35 lbs bond)
5 sheets
Refer to the Plain paper section
131 to 175 g/m
2
(35 to
47 lbs bond)
30 sheets
131 to 175 g/m
2
(35
to 47 lbs bond)
1 sheet
131 to 175 g/m
2
(35 to 47
lbs bond)
Tray1: 30 sheets
Optional tray: 50
sheets
131 to 175 g/m
2
(35 to
47 lbs bond)
5 sheets
Refer to the Plain paper section
176 to 220 g/m
2
(47 to
59 lbs bond)
30 sheets
176 to 220 g/m
2
(47
to 59 lbs bond)
1 sheet
176 to 220 g/m
2
(47 to 59
lbs bond)
Tray1: 30 sheets
Optional tray: 50
sheets
176 to 220 g/m
2
(47 to
59 lbs bond)
5 sheets
Type Size Dimensions
Weight/Capacity
a
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series CLX-626x series
Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1/ Optional tray Multi-purpose tray
Specifications
152
5. Appendix
Minimum size (custom) Tray1: 98 x 127 mm (3.86 x 5
inches)
Optional tray: 148.5 x 210 mm
(5.85 x 8.27inches)
Multi-Purpose tray/ Manual
Feeder: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5
inches)
60 to 220 g/m
2
( 16 to
59 lbs bond)
60 to 220 g/m
2
( 16
to 59 lbs bond)
60 to 220 g/m
2
( 16 to
59 lbs bond) for tray1
60 to 163 g/m
2
( 16 to
43 lbs bond) for
optional tray.
60 to 220 g/m
2
( 16 to
59 lbs bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
b. Post card 4 x 6 is supported for tray1, Manual feeder, or Multi-purpose tray.
c. Index card (3x5) is supported for Manual feeder and Multi-purpose tray.
d. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.
Type Size Dimensions
Weight/Capacity
a
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series CLX-626x series
Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1/ Optional tray Multi-purpose tray
Specifications
153
5. Appendix
3
System requirements
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Operating system
Requirement (recommended)
CPU RAM free HDD space
Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB
Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB
Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GB
Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1 GB) 15 GB
Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB
Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
•DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GB
Windows® 8
Windows® 8.1
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 2 GB (2 GB) 20 GB
Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
•DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2012
Windows Server® 2012 R2
Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2 GB) 32GB
Specifications
154
5. Appendix
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
Users who have administrator rights can install the software.
Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
Mac
Operating system
Requirements (Recommended)
CPU RAM Free HDD space
Mac OS X 10.4
•Intel
®
processors
•PowerPC G4/G5
128 MB for a powerPC based Mac (512 MB)
512 MB for an Intel-based Mac (1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.5
•Intel
®
processors
867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.6
•Intel
®
processors
1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.7-10.9
•Intel
®
processors
2 GB 4 GB
Specifications
155
5. Appendix
Linux
Unix
Items Requirements
Operating system
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6
Fedora 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
OpenSUSE 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3
Ubuntu 10.04, 10.10, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04, 12.10, 13.04
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11
Debian 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 7.1
Mint 13, 14, 15
CPU Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM 512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)
Items Requirements
Operating system
Sun Solaris 9, 10, 11 (x86, SPARC)
HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)
IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 7.1 (PowerPC)
Free HDD space Up to 100 MB
Specifications
156
5. Appendix
4
Network environment
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Items Specifications
Network interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan
•802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN
Network operating system
•Windows
®
XP, Windows Server
®
2003, Windows Vista
®
, Windows
®
7, Windows Server
®
2008 R2
•Various Linux OS
Mac OS X 10.5 -10.9 (Mac OS X 10.4: CLX-419x series/CLX-626x series only)
•UNIX OS
Network protocols •TCP/IPv4
DHCP, BOOTP
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
Wireless security Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK)
Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES
157
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with
several regulatory statements.
5
Laser safety statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-
1 : 2007.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service
condition.
Warning
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage
your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
6
Ozone safety
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good
ventilation.
Regulatory information
158
5. Appendix
7
Mercury Safety
8
Power saver
9
Recycling
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal
Laws.(U.S.A. only)
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that
reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on
your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified.
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Regulatory information
159
5. Appendix
10
China only
Website: http://www.samsung.com/cn/support/location/
supportServiceLocation.do?page=SERVICE.LOCATION
11
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
(Applicable in countries with separate collection
systems)
ポM9śJ
蜷筨*%
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
Regulatory information
160
5. Appendix
(The United States of America only)
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or
call, (877) 278 - 0799
12
State of California Proposition 65 Warning (US Only)
13
Taiwan only
14
Radio frequency emissions
FCC information to the user
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Regulatory information
161
5. Appendix
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Canadian radio interference regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and
Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et
Sciences Canada.
15
United States of America
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the
United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches)
from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless
device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the
RF exposure limits as set by the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Regulatory information
162
5. Appendix
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain
a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
16
Russia / Kazakhstan / Belarus only
17
Germany only
18
Turkey only
19
Thailand only
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
20
Canada only
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables
d’Industrie Canada.
Regulatory information
163
5. Appendix
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number
of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La
terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.
21
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission the following information:
1 the date and time of transmission
2 identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the
message; and
3 telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity
or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain uninterrupted service
22
Ringer Equivalence Number
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
Regulatory information
164
5. Appendix
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm
to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that
they:
a promptly notify the customer.
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
You should also know that:
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your
machine.
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or
telephone and electronic specialty stores.
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
23
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
Regulatory information
165
5. Appendix
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded
plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you
plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or
colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
24
Declaration of conformity (European countries)
Approvals and Certifications
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of
the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
Green and Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xN/
C145xN/CLX-626xND] is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Low Voltage
Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC).
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xFN/CLX-
419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-
626xFW] is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.
Regulatory information
166
5. Appendix
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
representative.
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European
countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure
network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained
in this document.
European radio approval information (for products
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label
to verify the presence of wireless devices.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European
Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European states qualified under wireless approvals:
EU countries
European states with restrictions on use:
EU
In France, this equipment may only be used indoors.
EEA/EFTA countries
No limitations at this time
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for
use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a
Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the
system label.
Regulatory information
167
5. Appendix
25
Israel only
26
Regulatory compliance statements
Wireless guidance
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. The following section is a general overview of
considerations while operating a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in
the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be
allowed.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less
energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.
Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact
during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of
common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with
equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations
require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane.
IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth
communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless
communication.
Regulatory information
168
5. Appendix
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and
Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples
where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in
environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless
devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or
turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio
Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on
the use of a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields
are in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
Regulatory information
169
5. Appendix
27
China only
᳝ᆇ⠽䋼
170
5. Appendix
Copyright
© 2014 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Google, Picasa, Google Cloud Print, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
REV. 9.05
QR code
The software included in this product contains open source software. You may obtain the complete
corresponding source code for a period of three years after the last shipment of this product by sending an email
to mailto:oss.request@samsung.com. It is also possible to obtain the complete corresponding source code in a
physical medium such as a CD-ROM; a minimal charge will be required.
The following URL http://opensource.samsu
ng.com/opensource/Samsung_C145x_C1860_CLX-
4190_CLX-6260_Series/seq/32 leads to the download page of the source code made available and open
source license information as related to this product. This oer is valid to anyone in receipt of this
information.
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
ADVANCED
User’s Guide
ADVANCED
User’s Guide
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration,
operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting
on Windows.
172
ADVANCED
1. Software Installation
Installation for Mac 175
Reinstallation for Mac 176
Installation for Linux 177
Reinstallation for Linux 178
2. Using a Network-Connected
Machine
Useful network programs 180
Wired network setup 181
Installing driver over the network 184
IPv6 configuration 192
Wireless network setup 195
Samsung Mobile Print 237
Using the NFC feature 238
AirPrint 245
Google Cloud Print™ 247
3. Useful Setting Menus
Before you begin reading a chapter 251
Print 252
Copy 253
Fax 259
Scan 264
System setup 269
Admin setup 283
Eco 284
Direct USB 285
4. Special Features
Altitude adjustment 287
Storing email address 288
Entering various characters 290
Setting up the fax address book 291
Registering authorized users 295
Printing features 296
Scan features 313
Fax features 322
173
ADVANCED
Using shared folder features 331
Using optional device features 332
5. Useful Management Tools
Accessing management tools 335
Easy Capture Manager 336
Samsung Easy Color Manager 337
Samsung AnyWeb Print 338
Easy Eco Driver 339
Using SyncThru™ Web Service 340
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 344
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 345
Using Samsung Printer Status 348
Using Samsung Printer Experience 350
6. Troubleshooting
Paper feeding problems 358
Power and cable connecting problems 359
Printing problems 360
Printing quality problems 364
Copying problems 372
Scanning problems 373
Faxing problems 375
Operating system problems 377
1. Software Installation
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the
machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using
the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network
connected machine’s driver (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 184).
Installation for Mac 175
Reinstallation for Mac 176
Installation for Linux 177
Reinstallation for Linux 178
If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine’s driver (see
"Installing the driver locally" on page 32).
Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).
175
1. Software Installation
Installation for Mac
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads)
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
10
Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and
click Continue.
11
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
If your machine supports fax, click Add Fax button to select your fax and
add it to your fax list
12
After the installation is finished, click Close.
176
1. Software Installation
Reinstallation for Mac
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1
Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Printer Software
Uninstaller.
2
To uninstall printer software, click Continue.
3
Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall.
4
Enter the password and click OK.
5
After the uninstallation is finished, click Close.
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility
or Print & Fax.
177
1. Software Installation
Installation for Linux
You need to download the Linux software packages from the Samsung website
to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Copy the Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
3
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the
package to.
4
Extract the package.
5
Move to uld folder.
6
Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as a root, execute
the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh")
7
Proceed with the installation.
8
When the installation is finished, launch printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program).
9
Click Add button.
10
Select your printer.
11
Click the Forward button and add it to your system.
178
1. Software Installation
Reinstallation for Linux
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1
Open Terminal program.
2
Move to uld folder extracted from Unified Linux Driver package.
3
Execute "./uninstall.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root,
execute the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./uninstall.sh")
4
Proceed with the uninstallation.
2. Using a Network-
Connected Machine
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software.
Useful network programs 180
Wired network setup 181
Installing driver over the network 184
IPv6 configuration 192
Wireless network setup 195
Samsung Mobile Print 237
Using the NFC feature 238
AirPrint 245
Google Cloud Print™ 247
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by
model" on page 7).
180
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
SyncThru™ Web Service
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the
following tasks (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 340).
Check the supplies information and status.
Customize machine settings.
Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine
status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain
person's email automatically.
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to
various network environments.
2
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing
network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network
machines from any site with corporate internet access.
Download this program from Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com
> find your product > Support or Downloads).
3
SetIP wired network setup
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)" on page 181.
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)" on page 182.
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)" on page 183.
The machine that does not support the network port, it will not be able
to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
181
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wired network setup
4
Printing a network configuration report
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel
that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set
up a network.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
The machine has the display screen: Press the (Menu) button on the
control panel and select Network > Network Configuration.
The machine has the touch screen: Press Setup from the Main screen >
Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Network Configuration.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78
IP Address: 169.254.192.192
5
Setting IP address
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements.
In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control
Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.
The following instructions may differ for your model.
1
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and
install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or
Downloads).
2
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Wired network setup
182
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
3
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
4
Turn on the machine.
5
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
6
Click the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
IP configuration window.
7
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
8
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences > Security > Firewall.
The following instructions may vary from your model.
1
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Wired network setup
183
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
10
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
11
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Set IP Address button.
12
Click the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
IP configuration window.
13
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
14
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences or Administrator.
The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems.
1
Download the SetIP program from the Samsung web site and extract it.
2
Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file in cdroot/Linux/noarch/
at_opt/share/utils folder.
3
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
4
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
5
The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration
Report.
184
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the
software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select
Software to Install window.
6
Windows
The firewall software might be blocking network communication. efore
connecting the device to the network, disable the computer’s firewall.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 181).
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Installing driver over the network
185
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
•You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the
Windows Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows
Store.
a From Charms, select Search.
b Click Store.
c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
d Click Install.
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 181).
2
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
3
Click Add a device.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
4
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see "Printing a
network configuration report" on page 229).
5
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
Installing driver over the network
186
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Silent installation Mode
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software
are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation
by typing /s or /S in the command window.
Command-line Parameters
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be
operated solely.
Command- line Definition Description
/s or
/S
Starts silent installation. Installs machine drivers
without prompting any UIs
or user intervention.
/p”<port name>” or
/P”<port name>”
Specifies printer port.
Network Port will be
created by use of
Standard TCP/IP
Port monitor. For
local port, this port
must exist on
system before
being specified by
command.
Printer port name can be
specified as IP address,
hostname, USB local port
name, IEEE1284 port name
or network path.
For example:
/p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
means IP address for
network printer. /
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /
p”hostname”
•/
p"\\computer_name\sha
red_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared
_printer" in where,
"\\computer_name\shar
ed_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared
_printer" means the
network path to the
printer by entering two
slashes, the computer
name or local IP address
of the PC sharing the
printer, and then the
share name of the
printer.
Command- line Definition Description
Installing driver over the network
187
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
/a”<dest_path>” or
/A”<dest_path>”
Specifies destination path
for installation.
The destination
path should be a
fully qualified path.
Since machine drivers
should be installed on the
OS specific location, this
command applies to only
application software.
/n”<Printer name>”
or
/N”<Printer name>”
Specifies printer name.
Printer instance shall be
created as specified printer
name.
With this parameter, you
can add printer instances as
your wishes.
/nd or
/ND
Commands not to set the
installed driver as a default
machine driver.
It indicates installed
machine driver will not be
the default machine driver
on your system if there are
one or more printer drivers
installed. If there is no
installed machine driver on
your system, then this
option won’t be applied
because Windows OS will
set installed printer driver as
a default machine driver.
Command- line Definition Description
/x or
/X
Uses existing machine
driver files to create printer
instance if it is already
installed.
This command provides a
way to install a printer
instance that uses installed
printer driver files without
installing an additional
driver.
/up”<printer
name>” or
/UP”<printer
name>”
Removes only specified
printer instance and not the
driver files.
This command provides a
way to remove only
specified printer instance
from your system without
effecting other printer
drivers. It will not remove
printer driver files from your
system.
/d or
/D
Uninstalls all device drivers
and applications from your
system.
This command will remove
all installed device drivers
and application software
from your system.
/v”<share name>” or
/V”<share name>”
Shares installed machine
and add other available
platform drivers for Point &
Print.
It will install all supported
Windows OS platform’s
machine drivers to system
and share it with specified
<share name> for point and
print.
Command- line Definition Description
Installing driver over the network
188
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
7
Mac
CLX-419x series/CLX-626x series: For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download
from the Samsung website to install the printer software (http://
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
/o or
/O
Opens Printers and Faxes
folder after installation.
This command will open
Printers and Faxes folder
after the silent installation.
/h, /H or /? Shows Command-line Usage.
Command- line Definition Description
Installing driver over the network
189
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
10
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Continue.
11
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
12
Click IP and select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
13
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.
14
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
15
If Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software
and your machine name in Print Using.
16
Click Add.
17
After the installation is finished, click Close.
8
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2
Copy the Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
3
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the
package to.
4
Extract the package.
5
Move to uld folder.
6
Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root, execute
the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh")
7
Proceed with the installation.
8
When the installation is finished, launch Printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing menu or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program).
9
Click the Add button.
Installing driver over the network
190
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
10
Select AppSocket/HP JetDirect and enter your machine's IP address.
11
Click the Forward button and add it to your system.
9
UNIX
Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before
installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 7).
The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not
type “”.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Operating System" on page 7).
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver
package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver
package from the Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com > find your
product > Support or Downloads).
Installing the UNIX printer driver package
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.
1
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer
Driver package to your computer.
2
Acquire root privileges.
su -
3
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.
4
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands.
gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -
5
Go to the unpacked directory.
6
Run the install script.
./install –i
install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the
UNIX Printer Driver package.
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the
installer script.
7
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation results.
8
Run “installprinter” from the command line. This will bring up the Add
Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to
the following procedures.
Installing driver over the network
191
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be
enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two
commands on the root terminal:
accept <printer_name>
enable <printer_name>
Uninstalling the printer driver package
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.
a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.
It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.
b Select the printer to be deleted.
c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.
d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole package.
e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c” command.
To re-install it, use the command “. /install –i” to reinstall the binaries.
Setting up the printer
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command
line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this
window according to the following steps:
1
Type the name of the printer.
2
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.
3
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the
Type field. This is optional.
4
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional.
5
Specify the printer location in the Location field.
6
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for
network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type,
only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.
7
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the
corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris
OS.
8
Select Copies to set the number of copies.
9
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.
10
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order.
11
Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.
12
Click OK to add the printer.
192
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
IPv6 configuration
IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7 or "Menu
overview" on page 36).
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and
managements.
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with
FE80).
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network
router.
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6
address.
10
From the control panel
Activating IPv6
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
1
Select (Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the
control panel.
Or select Setup> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP
(IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the touch screen.
2
Select On and press OK.
3
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
When you install the printer driver, do not configure both IPv4 and IPv6. We
recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6.
IPv6 configuration
193
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
DHCPv6 address configuration
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following
options for default dynamic host configuration.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
1
Select (Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the
control panel.
Or select Setup> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP
(IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the touch screen.
2
Press OK to select the required value you want.
DHCPv6 address: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.
11
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
Activating IPv6
1
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter
the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and
press the Enter key or click Go.
2
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
3
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the mouse
cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network
Settings.
4
Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.
5
Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6.
6
Click the Apply button.
7
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
IPv6 configuration
194
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
You can also set the DHCPv6.
To manually set the IPv6 address:
Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text
box is activated. Enter the rest of the address
(e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A
through F).
IPv6 address configuration
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network
Configuration Report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on
page 181).
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address
starts with FE80).
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a
network router.
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
3
Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.
195
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless
networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features
by model" on page 7).
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network settings
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
12
Getting started
Understanding your network type
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the
machine at a time.
Wireless network name and network password
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up,
a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Password are
created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information
before proceeding with the machine installation.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
Ad hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless
computer and wireless machine communicate directly.
Wireless network setup
196
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
13
Introducing wireless set up methods
You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting method from the below table.
Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country.
If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 234).
It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points. If you do not set the password on Acess Points, they might be exposed to illegal access
from unknown machine including PCs, smart phones and printers. Refer to the Access Point user guide for password settings.
CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW
Set up method Connecting method Description & Reference
With Access Point
From the computer Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 202.
Windows user, see "Access point without a USB cable (recommended)" on page 205.
Mac user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 216.
Mac user, see "Access point without a USB cable (recommended)" on page 218.
See "Using a network cable" on page 229.
From the machine’s control panel See "Machines with a display (or touch) screen" on page 199.
See "Machines without a display screen" on page 200.
See "Using the menu button or touch screen" on page 202.
Wireless network setup
197
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
CLX-626xFW
Without Access Point From the computer Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 208.
Mac user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 221.
Wi-Fi Direct setup See "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232.
Set up method Connecting method Description & Reference
With Access Point
From the computer Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable (recommended)" on page 210.
Mac user, see "Access point via USB cable (recommended)" on page 223.
See "Using a network cable" on page 229.
From the machine’s control panel See "Machines with a display (or touch) screen" on page 199.
See "Machines without a display screen" on page 200.
See "Using the menu button or touch screen" on page 202.
Without Access Point From the computer Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 208.
Mac user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 221.
Wi-Fi Direct setup See "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232.
Set up method Connecting method Description & Reference
Wireless network setup
198
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
14
Using the WPS button
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by
pressing the (WPS) button on the control panel without a computer.
If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to
connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide
of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.
When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings
may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless
security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access
point (or wireless router) you are using.
Items to prepare
Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS).
Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
Networked computer (PIN mode only)
Choosing your type
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network
using the (WPS) button on the control panel.
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your
machine to a wireless network by pressing both the (WPS) button on the
control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your
machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-
Fi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a
typical wireless network environment.
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, follow the next
procedure:
a Press Setup from the Main screen.
b Press Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS
Settings.
c Select the setup method you want.
Wireless network setup
199
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Machines with a display (or touch) screen
Connecting in PBC mode
1
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, press Setup
> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings.
2
Press PBC (or Connect via PBC).
3
Press OK when the confirmation window appears.
Information window appears showing 2 minutes connection processing
time.
4
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or
wireless router).
b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
c AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process,
the AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
5
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Connecting in PIN mode
1
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, press Setup
> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings.
2
Press PIN (or Connect via PIN).
3
Press OK when the confirmation window appears.
4
The eight-digit PIN appears on the display.
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network.
b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
c SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection
process, the AP’s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display.
5
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Wireless network setup
200
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Machines without a display screen
Connecting in PBC mode
1
Press and hold the (WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4
seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.
The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks
slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the
access point (or wireless router).
2
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to
the access point (or wireless router).
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless
network, the WPS LED light stays on.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Connecting in PIN mode
1
The network configuration report, including PIN, must be printed (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 181).
In ready mode, press and hold the (Stop or Stop/Clear) button on
the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN.
2
Press and hold the (WPS) button on the control panel for more than
4 seconds until the status LED stays on.
The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
3
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-
digit PIN.
The WPS LED blinks in the order below:
a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to
the access point (or wireless router).
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless
network, the WPS LED light stays on.
4
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Wireless network setup
201
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Re-connecting to a network
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect
to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless
connection settings and address.
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the
wireless network:
The machine is turned off and on again.
The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.
Canceling the connection process
To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to
the wireless network, press and release the (Stop or Stop/Clear) on the
control panel. You need to wait 2 minutes to re-connect to the wireless
network.
Disconnecting from a network
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the (WPS) button on
the control panel for more than two seconds.
When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately
disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off.
When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the
current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the
wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS
LED turns off.
Wireless network setup
202
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
15
Using the menu button or touch screen
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "CLX-419xFW/CLX-
626xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW" on page 42).
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the
network" on page 184).
1
Select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Network Setup > Wireless >
WLAN Settings on the touch screen.
2
Press the OK to select the setup method you want.
Search List (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic.
The machine will display a list of available networks from which to
choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the
corresponding security key.
Custom: In this mode, users can give or edit manually their own SSID
, or choose the security option in detail.
16
Setup using Windows (CLX-419x series/C145x series/
C186x series)
Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD: If
you have installed the printer driver once, you can access the Samsung
Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD(see "Accessing management
tools" on page 335).
Access point via USB cable
Items to prepare
Access point
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Creating the infrastructure network
1
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
Wireless network setup
203
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
4
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
5
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
6
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
Wireless network setup
204
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
7
Select Using a USB cable on the Select the Wireless Setup Method
screen. Then, click Next.
8
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP AES).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security settings.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
Wireless network setup
205
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
9
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appear.
Click Next.
Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports
this feature.
Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 232).
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
10
When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Access point without a USB cable (recommended)
Items to prepare
WiFi-enabled PC running Windows 7 or higher and an access point (router)
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
While setting the wireless network, the machine uses PC’s wireless LAN. You
might not be able to connect to the Internet.
Wireless network setup
206
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Creating the infrastructure network
1
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
5
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
Wireless network setup
207
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
6
Select Using a direct wireless connection on the Select the Wireless
Setup Method screen. Then, click Next.
Even if your computer is running Windows 7 or hight, you cannot use this
feature if your PC does not support wireless network. Set the wireless
network using a USB cable (see "Access point via USB cable" on page 202).
If below screen appears, press the (WPS) button from the control
panel within 2 minutes.
For the model with a touch screen, press Accept on the touch
screen.
7
When the wireless network set up is completed, click Next.
8
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Wireless network setup
208
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
Items to prepare
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows
1
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
Wireless network setup
209
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
4
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
5
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
6
Select Using a USB cable on the Select the Wireless Setup Method
screen. Then, click Next.
7
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security enabled.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
8
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
Wireless network setup
210
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the
static IP address.
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
9
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
10
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
17
Setup using Windows (CLX-626x series)
Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD: If
you have installed the printer driver once, you can access the Samsung
Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD(see "Accessing management
tools" on page 335).
Access point via USB cable (recommended)
Items to prepare
Access point
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Wireless network setup
211
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Creating the infrastructure network
1
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
4
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
5
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
6
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
7
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
Wireless network setup
212
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP AES).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security settings.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
8
When the network connection window appears, disconnect the network
cable. Then, click Next. The network cable connection can interfere with
searching for wireless devices.
9
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appear.
If you want to enable Wi-Fi Direct, check the checkbox, and click Next. If
not, click just Next.
Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 232).
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
Wireless network setup
213
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
10
When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
Items to prepare
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows
1
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
4
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
Wireless network setup
214
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
5
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
6
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
7
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security enabled.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
Wireless network setup
215
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
8
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the
static IP address.
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
9
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
10
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Wireless network setup
216
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
18
Setup using Mac (CLX-419x series/C145x series/
C186x series)
Access point via USB cable
Items to prepare
Access point
Network-connected printer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads)
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
Wireless network setup
217
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
11
If Wireless Settings screen appears, select Using a USB cable and click
Next.
If the screen does not appear, go to step 15.
Wireless network setup
218
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
12
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret
key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP, AES)
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security enabled.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
13
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports
this feature.
Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 232).
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
14
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
15
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
Access point without a USB cable (recommended)
Items to prepare
WiFi-enabled Mac running Mac OS 10.7 or higher and an access point
(router)
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
Wireless network setup
219
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
Wireless network setup
220
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
11
If Wireless Settings screen appears, select Using a direct wireless
connection and click Next.
If the screen does not appear, go to step 13.
If below screen appears, press the (WPS) button from the control panel
within 2 minutes.
For the model with a touch screen, press Accept on the touch screen.
12
When the wireless network set up is completed, click Next.
13
After the installation is finished, click Close.
Wireless network setup
221
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Items to prepare
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
Wireless network setup
222
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
11
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is case-
sensitive).
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security setting.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
12
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
Wireless network setup
223
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP
address.
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is shown as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
13
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is
confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next.
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the
machine when configuring the wireless network.
14
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.
15
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click
Quit.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
page 175).
19
Setup using Mac (CLX-626x series)
Access point via USB cable (recommended)
Items to prepare
Access point
Network-connected printer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
Wireless network setup
224
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads)
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
Wireless network setup
225
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
11
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret
key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP, AES)
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security enabled.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
12
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appears.
If you want to enable Wi-Fi Direct, check the checkbox, and click Next. If
not, click just Next.
Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 232).
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
13
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine.
Wireless network setup
226
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
14
Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished,
click Quit.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
page 175).
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Items to prepare
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Wireless network setup
227
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
11
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is case-
sensitive).
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security setting.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
Wireless network setup
228
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
12
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP
address.
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is shown as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
13
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is
confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next..
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the
machine when configuring the wireless network.
14
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.
15
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click
Quit.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
page 175).
Wireless network setup
229
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
20
Using a network cable
Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this
feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over
the network" on page 184).
See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless
network, for information about your network configuration.
Items to prepare
Access point
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
Network cable
Printing a network configuration report
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network
configuration report.
See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report.
See "Setting IP address" on page 181.
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.
Wireless network setup
230
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection
status.
1
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If
not, connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
4
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
5
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
6
Click Wireless > Wizard.
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if
you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom.
7
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless
network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect
to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is
case sensitive.
Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
connections (see "Wireless network name and network password"
on page 195).
- Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
- Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the
access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID.
8
Click Next.
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network password) and click Next.
Wireless network setup
231
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
9
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If
the setup is right, click Apply.
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should
then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc
mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.
10
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
21
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off
If your machine has a display, you can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the
machine’s control panel using the Network menu.
1
Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
4
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
5
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
6
Click Wireless > Custom.
You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.
Wireless network setup
232
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
22
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the
Wi-Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure
connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode.
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while
concurrently connecting to an access point. You can also use a wired network
and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print
documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network.
You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the
printer’s Wi-Fi Direct.
The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct
networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP
services.
The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct
is 3.
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.
From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended)
After the driver installation is complete, Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be
set and changes in the Wi-Fi Direct can be made.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows
and Mac OS users only.
- From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Device Settings >
Network.
Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable.
Device Name: Enter the printer’s name for searching for your
printer on a wireless network. By default, the device name is the
model name.
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is
used only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired
or wireless network. We recommend using the default local IP
address (the default local IP address of the printer for Wi-Fi Direct is
192.168.3.1 )
Wireless network setup
233
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi
Direct group’s owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless
access point. We recommend activating this option.
Network Password: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network
Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your
printer. You can configure a network password yourself, or can
remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated
by default.
From the machine (Machines with a display screen)
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 ).
Select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Network Setup > Wireless > Wi-Fi
Direct on the touch screen.
Enable Wi-Fi Direct.
From the network-connected computer
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable
and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru™ Web Service.
Access SyncThru™ Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings >
Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options.
•For Linux OS users,
- Print an IP network configuration report to check the output (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 181).
- Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings
> Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
- Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct.
Setting up the mobile device
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the
mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct.
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing
application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your
smartphone.
When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your
mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the
WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile
device.
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you need to enter
the "Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button.
Wireless network setup
234
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
23
Troubleshooting for wireless network
Problems during setup or driver installation
Printers Not Found
Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the
machine.
USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect
the machine to your computer using the USB cable.
The machine does not support wireless networking. Check the machine's
user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and
prepare a wireless network machine.
Connecting Failure - SSID Not Found
The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or
entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try
connecting again.
Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security
Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your
access point and machine.
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error
Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB
cable and your machine’s power.
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network
Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired
network cable from your machine.
Connecting Failure - Assigning the IP address
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router) and machine.
PC Connection Error
The configured network address is unable to connect between your
computer and machine.
- For a DHCP network environment
The machine receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when
computer is configured to DHCP.
If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode, the problem may be caused
by the automatically changed IP address. Compare the IP address between
the product's IP address and the printer port's IP address.
How to compare:
1 Print the network information report of your printer, and then check the
IP address (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181).
Wireless network setup
235
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
2 Check the printer port's IP address from your computer.
a Click the Windows Start menu.
For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Settings.
b For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
c Right-click your machine.
d For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7/8 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has mark, you can select other printer
drivers connected with selected printer.
e Click Port tab.
f Click Configure Port... button.
g Check if Printer Name or IP Address: is the IP address on the network
configuration Sheet.
3 Change the printer port's IP address if it is different from the network
information report's.
If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP,
Connect to a network printer. Then reconnect the IP address.
- For a Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured
to static address.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
IP address: 169.254.133.42
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then the machine’s network information should be as below:
IP address: 169.254.133.43
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
Other problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time.
Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be
turned on.
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from
the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the
signal.
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
communication.
Wireless network setup
236
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it
cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and
try searching for the machine again.
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.
Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless
router) administrator.
Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the
settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the
characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the
machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset.
Register the product's MAC address when you configure the DHCP server on
the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address
that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the MAC address of your
machine by printing a network configuration report (see "Printing a network
configuration report" on page 181).
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.
When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista,
you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use
the wireless machine.
You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for
Samsung wireless network machines.
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless
signal.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not
separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave
oven and some Bluetooth devices.
Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router)
changes, you must do the product's wireless network setup again.
The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3.
If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, this machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g.
If the access point is set to work with the 802.11n standard only, it may not
connect to your machine.
237
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Samsung Mobile Print
24
What is Samsung Mobile Print?
Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print photos,
documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung
Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones
but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile device to a
network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi-Fi
access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn’t
necessary – just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application, and it will
automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos,
web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have a Samsung
multifunction printer, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for
quick and easy viewing on your mobile device.
25
Downloading Samsung Mobile Print
To download Samsung Mobile Print, go to the application store (Samsung
Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your mobile device, and just search for
Samsung Mobile Print.” You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your
computer.
26
Supported Mobile OS
Android OS 2.3 or higher
iOS 4.0 or higher
238
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Using the NFC feature
The NFC (Near Field Communication) printer allows you to directly print/scan/
fax from your mobile device just by holding your mobile device over the NFC tag
on your printer. It does not require installing print driver or connecting to an
access point. You just need NFC supported mobile device. In order to use this
feature, Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed on your mobile device.
Depending on the material of the mobile device cover, NFC recognition
may not work properly.
Depending on the mobile device you are using, the transmission speed
may differ.
This feature is available only for the model with a NFC tag (see "Machine
overview" on page 22).
Using a cover or a battery other than the ones that came with the mobile
device, or a metal cover/sticker can block NFC.
If NFC devices keep failing to communicate, remove and reinstall the
battery from the mobile device, then try again.
27
Requirements
NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled, Samsung Mobile Print app installed mobile
device with Android OS 4.0 or higher.
Only Android OS 4.1 or higher will automatically enable the Wi-Fi Direct
feature on your mobile device when you enable the NFC feature. We
recommend you to upgrade your mobile device to Android OS 4.1 or higher
to use the NFC feature.
Wi-Fi Direct feature enabled printer (see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page
232).
Using the NFC feature
239
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
28
Printing
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232).
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag( ) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
3
Select print mode.
4
Select the content you want to print.
If neccessary, change the print option by pressing the .
Using the NFC feature
240
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
5
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag( ) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
6
The printer starts printing.
29
Scanning
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232).
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag( ) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
Using the NFC feature
241
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
3
Select scan mode.
4
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
If necessary, change the scan option by pressing the .
5
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag( ) on your printer.
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
6
The printer starts scanning the content.
The scanned data is saved on your mobile device.
If you want to continue scanning, follow the instruction on the app screen.
Using the NFC feature
242
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
30
Sending Fax
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232).
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag( ) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
3
Select fax mode.
4
Select the content you want to send fax.
If necessary, enter the fax number and change the fax option by pressing
the .
Using the NFC feature
243
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
5
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag( ) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
6
The printer starts faxing the content.
31
Registering Google Cloud Printer
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer.
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag( ) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
Using the NFC feature
244
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
3
Select device status icon.
4
Select Google Cloud Print > Register Google Cloud Printer.
5
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag( ) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
6
Confirm your printer in pop-up window.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service
245
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
AirPrint
Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the box
your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark.
32
Setting up AirPrint
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the
AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following
methods.
1
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
4
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. If it’s your first time
logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and
password. We recommend you to change the default password for
security reasons.
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
5
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings.
6
Click Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP or mDNS .
You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNS protocol.
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad,
and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS.
AirPrint
246
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
33
Printing via AirPrint
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
1
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
2
Touch the action icon( ).
3
Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.
4
Touch Print button. Print it out.
Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary,
click the print center icon ( ) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in
the print center.
247
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your
smart phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your
Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud
Print™ service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome
browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™ application on your mobile device, so you
don’t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. Refer to the Google
website (http://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/ or http://
support.google.com/cloudprint) for more information about Google Cloud
Print™.
34
Registering your Google account to the printer
Registering from Samsung Mobile Print app
In order to use this feature, Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed
on your cell phone.
1
Open Samsung Mobile Print app from your mobile device.
2
Select device setting.
3
Select Google Cloud Print.
4
Enter your printer’s name and description.
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure
the proxy’s IP and port number from Proxy Setting. Contact your network
service provider or network administrator for more information.
5
Click Register .
Confirm your printer in the pop-up window.
6
Click Finish.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Registering from the Chrome Browser
Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
wireless network that has access to the Internet.
You should create your Google account in the advance.
1
Open the Chrome browser.
2
Visit www.google.com.
3
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail™ address.
Google Cloud Print™
248
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
4
Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key
or click Go.
5
Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
6
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure
the proxy’s IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >
Google Cloud Print > Proxy Setting. Contact your network service
provider or network administrator for more information.
7
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings > Google Cloud Print.
8
Enter your printer’s name and description.
9
Click Register.
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not
appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.
10
Click Finish printer registration.
11
Click Manage your printers.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.
Google Cloud Print™
249
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
35
Printing with Google Cloud Print™
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you
are using. You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™
service.
Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet.
Printing from an application on mobile device
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from
Android mobile phone.
1
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
If you do not have the application, download it from the application store
such as Android Market or App Store.
2
Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.
3
Tap the option button of the document that you want to print.
4
Tap the send button.
5
Tap the Cloud Print button.
6
Set the printing options if you want.
7
Tap Click here to Print.
Printing from the Chrome browser
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
1
Run Chrome.
2
Open the document or email that you want to print.
3
Click the wrench icon in the browser’s top right corner.
4
Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.
5
Select Print with Google Cloud Print.
6
Click the Print button.
3. Useful Setting Menus
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for advanced
machine setup.
Before you begin reading a chapter 251
Print 252
Copy 253
Fax 259
Scan 264
System setup 269
Admin setup 283
Eco 284
Direct USB 285
251
3. Useful Setting Menus
Before you begin reading a chapter
This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features.
You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide (see "Menu overview" on page 36).
The following are tips for using this chapter
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing (Menu)
or from the touch screen.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
For models that do not have the (Menu) on the control panel, this feature is not applicable (see "Control panel overview" on page 26).
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
252
3. Useful Setting Menus
Print
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Print Setup on the touch screen.
Item Description
Orientation
Selects the direction in which information is printed on a
page.
Portrait
Landscape
Copies
You can enter the number of copies using the number
keypad.
Resolution
Specifies the number of dots printed per inch (dpi). The
higher the setting, the sharper printed characters and
graphics.
Clear Text Prints text darker than on a normal document.
Emulation
Sets the emulation type and option.
Emulation Type: The machine language defines how
the computer communicates with the machine.
Setup: Sets the detailed settings for the selected
emulation type.
Edge Enhance
It allows user to enhance sharpness of text and graphics
for improving readability.
Trapping
It reduces the white gap caused by misalignment of color
channels in color printing mode. Also black text will be
overprinted on other colors.
Screen
This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color
output.
Normal: This mode will generate printouts with
smooth tone over the entire page.
Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with
sharp texts and smooth graphic/photo objects in the
page.
Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with
sharp details over the entire page.
Select Tray Sets the select tray type.
Item Description
253
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
1
Copy feature
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (copy) > (Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Or (Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Copy Default
on the touch screen.
Or press Copy > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item Description
Original Size Sets the image size.
Copies
You can enter the number of copies using the number
keypad.
Reduce/Enlarge
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see
"Reduced or enlarged copy" on page 74).
If the machine is set to Eco mode, reduce and
enlarge features are not available.
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 73)
Original Type
Improves the copy quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job (see "Original Type" on
page 73)
Auto Color
You can sets whether to use Auto color on or off.
On: Select this setting to automatically detect
whether the scanned document is in color or black
and white, and then select an appropriate color
setting.
Basic Copy Copies can be started quickly.
Custom Copy Copies can be customized through detailed options.
Item Description
Copy
254
3. Useful Setting Menus
Color Mode
You can select the default color mode to use for copy
jobs.
Auto: Select this setting to automatically detect
whether the scanned document is in color or black
and white, and then select an appropriate color
setting.
Color: Select this setting to print the same as the
original image color.
Mono: Select this setting to print the copy in black
and white, regardless whether the scanned
document is in color or in black and white.
Tray
Allows you to check the current tray settings and
change the settings if necessary.
Auto: You can set the machine to automatically
to the tray with the same sized paper when the
tray in use is empty.
Stamp
You can apply the stamp feature.
Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page
number, device information, comment, or user ID, to
the copy output.
Opacity: You can select the transparency.
Position: Sets the position.
Item Description
Auto Fit Copy Copies image to fit automatically to the paper size.
Layout Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy, 2/4-up, etc.
ID Copy This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item
such as business card (see "ID card copying" on page
75).
Collation
Collation Copy
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you
make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page
document will print followed by a second complete
document.
On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of
originals.
Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual
pages.
Item Description
Copy
255
3. Useful Setting Menus
2-up or 4-up
N-up Copy
Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4
pages onto one sheet of paper.
Item Description
1 2
1 2
3 4
Book Copy
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire
book. If the book is too thick, lift the cover until its
hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the
cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,
start copying with the cover open.
Off: Does not use this feature.
Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the
book.
Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the
book.
Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of
the book.
This copy feature is available only when you
place originals on the scanner glass.
Item Description
Copy
256
3. Useful Setting Menus
Adjust Bkgd.
Adjust Background
Prints an image without its background. This copy
feature removes the background color and can be
helpful when copying an original containing color in
the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog.
Off: Does not use this feature.
Auto: Optimizes the background.
Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the
more vivid the background is.
Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter
the background is.
Item Description
Edge Erase
Allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold creases and
staple marks along any of the four edges of a document.
Off: Does not use this feature.
SmallOriginal: rases the edge of the original if it is
small. This feature is available only when you place
originals on the scanner glass.
Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.
Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper
which is black and horizontal, when you copy a
book. This feature is available only when you place
originals on the scanner glass.
Border Erase: Enter the left, right, top, bottom
margin using Number keypad.
Item Description
Copy
257
3. Useful Setting Menus
Watermark
The watermark option allows you to print text over an
existing document. For example, you use it when you
want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or
“CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first
page or all pages of a document.
Duplex
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of
paper.
1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints it on
one side of the paper.
1->2Sided
1->2Sided Rotated
Item Description
Duplex (continue)
2->1Sided
2->2Sided
2->1Sided Rotated
Item Description
Copy
258
3. Useful Setting Menus
2
Copy Setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (copy) > (Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
Or (Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
Item Description
Change Default
The copy options can be set to those most frequently
used.
259
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
3
Fax Feature
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (fax) > (Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
Or press Fax > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Item Description
Original Size Sets the image size.
Original Type
Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the
original document being scanned.
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 81).
Resolution
The default document settings produce good results
when using typical text-based originals. However, if you
send originals that are of poor quality, or contain
photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce
a higher quality fax (see "Resolution" on page 80).
Color Mode
Selects the color mode in which you want to send the
fax.
Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.
Color: Transmits a fax in color.
Duplex
This function is especially intended for two-sided
originals. You can select whether the machine sends
the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side
only.
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the
originals on the DADF. If the machine cannot
detect the original on the DADF, it
automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.
Memory Send Fax can be customized through detailed options.
Item Description
Fax
260
3. Useful Setting Menus
On Hook Dial Access a dial tone to send fax.
Speed Dial Send Fax image to destination from speed dial list.
Group Dial Send Fax image to destination from group dial list.
Redial
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller
ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number
in edit mode (see "Redialing the fax number" on page
322).
Multi Send
Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax
to multiple destinations" on page 79).
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
Delay Send
Delayed Send
Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you
will not be present (see "Delaying a fax transmission" on
page 323).
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
Item Description
Send Forward
Receive Forward
Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax or PC. If you are out of office but have to receive
the fax, this feature may be useful.
See "Forwarding a sent fax to another destination"
on page 324.
See "Forwarding a received fax" on page 325.
Secure Receive
Stores the received fax in memory without printing out.
To print received documents, you need to enter the
password. You can prevent your received faxes from
being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving
in secure receiving mode" on page 329).
Cancel Job
Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory
(see "Canceling a reserved fax job" on page 324).
Item Description
Fax
261
3. Useful Setting Menus
4
Sending setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Item Description
Redial Times
Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the
machine will not redial.
Redial Term Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.
Prefix Dial
Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials
before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful
for accessing a PABX exchange.
ECM Mode
Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to
makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any
error. It may take more time.
Fax Confirmation
Fax Send
Confirmation
Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax
transmission was successfully completed or not.
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
Modem speed
Select the maximum modem speed you want if the
phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed. You
can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4, 12.0, 9.6 or 4.8 kbps.
Image TCR
Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of
the first page of the fax sent.
Dial Mode
Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This
setting may not be available depending on your
country.
Toll Save
Sends faxes at a preset toll-saving time to save on call
costs. This setting may not be available depending on
your country.
Setup Wizard
Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options
such as machine ID, fax number, etc.
Item Description
Fax
262
3. Useful Setting Menus
5
Receiving setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Item Description
Receive Mode
Selects the default fax receiving mode (see "Changing
the receive modes" on page 327).
Ring To Answer
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before
answering an incoming call.
Stamp RCV Name
Automatically prints the page number, and the date
and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a
received fax.
Rcv Start Code
Initiates fax reception from an extension phone
plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the
machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear
fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the
factory.
Auto Reduction
Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the
size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Discard Size
Discards a specific length from the end of the received
fax.
DRPD Mode
Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer
several different telephone numbers. You can set the
machine to recognize different ring patterns for each
number. This setting may not be available depending
on your country (see "Receiving faxes using DRPD
mode" on page 328).
Duplex Print
Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper.
You can save the paper usage.
Off: Prints only one side of the paper.
Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however,
the binding will be the long edge.
Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however,
the binding will be the short edge.
Item Description
Fax
263
3. Useful Setting Menus
6
Change Default setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Setup > Change Default on the control
panel.
Item Description
Change Default
The fax options can be set to those most frequently
used.
264
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
7
Scan feature
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (scan) > (Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.
Or Scan to > (Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Scan Default
on the touch screen.
Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item Description
USB Default
USB Feature
USB
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals
and save the scanned image to a USB device.
Email Default
Custom Email
Scan to Email
Sets scan destination to an email. You scan the originals
and email the scanned image to destinations (see
"Scanning to email" on page 315).
FTP Feature
FTP Default
FTP
Sets scan destination to an FTP server. You scan the
originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server
(see "Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 317).
SMB Feature
SMB Default
SMB
Sets scan destination to an SMB server. You scan the
originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server
(see "Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 317).
Local PC
Sets scan destination to a usb-connected computer.
You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a
directory such as My Documents (see "Basic Scanning"
on page 77).
Network PC
Sets scan destination to a network-connected
computer. You scan the originals and save the scanned
image to a directory such as My Documents (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page
314).
Item Description
Scan
265
3. Useful Setting Menus
File Format
Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If
you select JPEG, TIFF, XPS or PDF, you can select to scan
multiple pages. Depending on the selected scan type,
this option may not appear.
Single-TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged
Image File Format), and several originals are scanned
as an each individual TIFF file.
Multi-TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image
File Format), but several originals are scanned as one
file.
Single-PDF: Scans the originals in PDF, and several
originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file.
Multi-PDF: Scans originals in PDF, but several
originals are scanned as one file.
Single-XPS: Scans the originals in XPS, and several
originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file.
Multi-XPS: Scans originals in XPS, but several
originals are scanned as one file.
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
XPS: This feature is only supported for the
devices that have mass storage.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected in
the File Format option, if Mono has been
selected for Color Mode.
Item Description
Shared Folder
Sets scan destination to a shared folder. You can create
and use the shared folder (see "Using shared folder
features" on page 331).
Item Description
Scan
266
3. Useful Setting Menus
8
Scan setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (scan) > (Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.
Or Scan to > (Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Scan Default
on the touch screen.
Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item Description
Destination Enter the destination’s information.
Change Default
The scan options can be set to those most frequently
used.
Original Size Sets the image size.
Original Type Sets the original document’s type.
Resolution Sets the image resolution.
Color Mode
You can select the color options of scan outputs.
Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per
pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image.
8 bits per pixel.
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit
per pixel.
Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to scan.
Item Description
Scan
267
3. Useful Setting Menus
Duplex
Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper (1
Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides
of the paper (2 Sided Rotated).
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side
only.
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, the
machine shows the window asking to place
another page. Load another original and press
Yes. When you finish, select No for this option.
File Policy
You can choose the policy for generating file name
before you proceed with the scan job through server or
USB memory device. If the server or the USB memory
device already has the same name you enter, you can
change the name, cancel the job, or overwrite it.
Rename: The sent file is saved as a different file
name that is automatically programmed.
Overwrite: Overwrites the existing the file.
File Name Makes a file name to store the scan data.
Item Description
Server Confirmation
You can set the machine to print server confirmation
result report.
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
Email Confirmation
You can set the machine to print email confirmation
result report.
•If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
If a report contains characters or fonts that
the machine does not support, Unknown
could be printed instead of the characters/
fonts in the report.
PDF Encryption
Encrypts the PDF files when you scan the originals in
PDF format. Select On to encrypt the PDF file, and set
up a password. To open the file, users need to enter the
password
Subject Sets an email’s subject.
From Sets a sender’s email address.
Item Description
Scan
268
3. Useful Setting Menus
CC Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient.
BCC
The same as CC but the recipient's name is not
displayed.
WSD
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on the
connected computer if it supports the WSD (Web
Service for Device) feature.
Item Description
269
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
9
Machine setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup on the touch
screen.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > select the menu item you want on the
touch screen.
Item Description
Machine ID
Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Fax Number
Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Date & Time Sets the date and time.
Clock Mode
Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and
24 hr.
Receive Mode Selects the default fax receiving mode.
Receive code
This feature works best when you are using an extension
telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of
your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you
are talking to on the extension telephone, without going
to the fax machine. *9* is the remote receive code preset
at the factory (see "Receiving faxes with an extension
telephone" on page 328).
Select Country Selects the country.
Sound/Volume Sets the sound/volume option.
Toner Status Alert
If toner in the cartridge has run out, a message informing
the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can
set the option for this message to appear or not.
Item Description
System setup
270
3. Useful Setting Menus
ImageOverwrite
You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the
memory. The machine overwrites the data with different
patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery.
Manual: When printing, copying, scanning, and
faxing, the machine temporarily uses memory space.
For security reasons, you can set the machine to
manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If
you want to secure memory space, you can manually
overwrite secure non-volatile memory.
Automatic: When a job is completed, there are
temporary images left in the memory. For security
reasons, you can set the machine to automatically
overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to
secure memory space, you can set the machine to
automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory
Language
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control
panel display.
Default Mode
Sets the machine’s default mode among fax mode, copy
mode, or scan mode.
Default Paper Size You can set the default paper size to use.
Power Save
Sets how long the machine waits before going to power
save mode.
When the machine does not receive data for an extended
period of time, power consumption is automatically
lowered.
Item Description
System Timeout
Sets the time that the machine remembers previously
used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine
restores the default copy settings.
Job Timeout
Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing
the last page of a print job that does not end with a
command to print the page.
Wakeup Event
When this option is "On", you can wake up the machine
from the power saving mode with the following actions:
pressing any button on the control panel
loading paper in a tray
opening or closing the front cover
pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in
connecting a USB memory device (only for the models
that support USB memory devices)
If the machine does not have the touch screen,
you can wake up the machine from the power
saving mode by pressing any button on the
control panel regardless of this option’s setting.
Item Description
System setup
271
3. Useful Setting Menus
Auto Continue
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match the
paper settings.
0 Sec: This option allows you to continue printing
when the paper size you have set is mismatched with
the paper in the tray.
30 Sec: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message
will display. The machine waits for about 30 second,
then automatically clear the message and continue
printing.
Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits
until you insert the correct paper.
Altitude
Adjustment
Optimize print quality according to the machine’s
altitude.
Humidity
Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the
environment.
Auto CR
Allows you to append the required carriage return to
each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users.
Firmware Version Shows the product’s firmware version.
Item Description
Auto Tray Switch
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match. For
example, if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same
size paper, the machine automatically prints from tray 2
after the tray 1 runs out of paper.
This option does not appear if you selected Auto
for Paper Source from printer driver.
Paper Substitution
Automatically substitutes the printer driver’s paper size
to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4.
For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set
the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine
prints on A4 paper and vice versa.
Skip Blank Pages
The printer detects the printing data from computer
whether a page is empty or not. You can set to print or
skip the blank page.
Tray Protection
Decides to use or not use the Auto tray switch feature.
If you set tray 1 to On, for example, then tray 1 is
excluded during tray switching.
This setting works for copy or print jobs: It
doesn't affect fax jobs.
Item Description
System setup
272
3. Useful Setting Menus
PDF Type
Allows you to select the PDF type when saving the data as
a PDF file.
Standard: Saves the data as a regular PDF.
PDF/A: Saves the data as a PDF that has the necessary
information to render itself in any environment.
PDF/A file must be self-contained: it cannot rely
on another application to render fonts, open
hyperlinks, or execute scripts, audio files, or video
files.
Stamp
You can apply the stamp feature.
Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page
number, device information, or user ID, to the copy
output.
Opacity: You can select the transparency.
Position: Sets the position.
Address Book Views or prints the phone book or email address list.
Import Setting
Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the
machine.
Export Setting
Exports data stored on the machine stick to a USB
memory.
Item Description
CLR Empty Msg
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You
can clear the empty message.
Troubleshooting
Helpful information for what to do if you encounter an
error.
Eco Settings
Allows you to save print resources and enables eco-
friendly printing.
Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode
on or off.
On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with
password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode
on/off, the user needs to enter the password.
Select Template: Selects the eco template set from
the SyncThru™ Web Service.
Vapor Mode
You can reduce the amount of water vapor produced
during printing.
Off: Disables vapor mode.
On: Enables vapor mode.
Auto: Automatically enters vapor mode according to
time in high humidity environments.
Item Description
System setup
273
3. Useful Setting Menus
Auto Power Off
Turns power off automatically when the machine has
been in power save mode for the length of time set in
Auto Power Off > On > Timeout.
To turn the machine on again, press the
(Power/Wake up) button on the control panel
(make sure the main power switch is on).
If you run the printer driver or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager, the time automatically
extends.
While the machine is connected to the
network or working on a print job, Auto
Power Off feature doesn't work.
Image
Management
Image Mgr.
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color
registration, color density, etc.
Custom Color This menu allows you to adjust contrast, color by color.
Default: Optimizes colors automatically.
Print Density: Allows you to manually adjust the color
density for print. Adjust the print density.
It is recommended to use the Default setting for best
color quality.
Item Description
Auto Color Reg.
Auto Color
Registration
The machine virtually prints certain patterned image to
calibrate the color printing position. This feature
enhances the colored image sharper and clearer, which
means the machine prints the colored image on the
paper more like the one in the monitor.
If you have moved the machine, it is strongly
recommended to operate this menu manually.
Tone Adjustment Default: The machine automatically calibrates the
toner density of machine for the best possible color
print quality. If you select Off, the machine is calibrated
by the factory default toner density.
Auto Tone Adjustment (Auto Tone Adj.): Allows you
to automatically adjust tone for the best possible print
quality.
Calibrating ID Sensor (Cal. ID Sensor): Automatically
calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner
or machine parts and uses this information to adjust
the color density. For example, if the yellow toner is
running out, the machine calculates the amount of
remaining yellow toner and adjusts color density so
the printouts are fine.
Item Description
System setup
274
3. Useful Setting Menus
10
Paper setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Paper Setup on the touch
screen.
Item Description
Paper Size
Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes,
according to your requirements.
Paper Type Chooses the type of the paper for each tray.
Paper Source Selects from which tray the paper is used.
Margin Sets the margins for the document.
Common Margin
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
Duplex Margin: Sets the margin for double-sided
printing.
Binding: When printing on both sides of the paper,
side A's margin closest to the binding will be the same
as side B's margin closest to the binding. Likewise, the
sides' margins farthest from the binding will be the
same.
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Emulation Margin
Sets the paper margins for emulation print page.
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
MP Tray
Sets the paper margins in multi-purpose tray.
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided
printing.
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Manual Feeder Sets the paper margins in manual feeder tray.
Item Description
System setup
275
3. Useful Setting Menus
11
Sound / Volume
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (Menu) > System Setup > Sound on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Initial Setup > Sound/Volume
on the touch screen.
Tray Confirm
Activates the tray confirmation message. If you open and
close a tray, a window asking you whether to set the
paper size and type for the tray just opened appears.
<Tray X>
Sets the paper margins for the paper trays.
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided
printing.
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Item Description
Item Description
Key Sound
Turns the key sound on or off. A tone sounds each time a
key is pressed if this option is on.
Alarm Sound
Turns the alarm sound on or off. An alarm tone sounds
when an error occurs or fax communication ends if this
option is on.
System setup
276
3. Useful Setting Menus
12
Report
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Reports on the touch screen.
Speaker Volume
Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line
through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone.
With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker
is on until the remote machine answers.
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook
Dial. You can adjust the speaker volume only
when the telephone line is connected.
a Press (fax) on the control panel.
b Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from
the speaker.
c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you
want.
d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and
return to ready mode.
Dial Tone volume
Adjusts the dial tone volume. You can select different
levels.
Ring Volume Adjusts the ring volume. You can select different levels.
Item Description
Item Description
Configuration
Prints a report on the machine's overall
configuration.
Supplies Info.
Supplies Information
Prints supplies’ information page.
Address Book
Prints all of the email addresses currently stored
in the machine’s memory.
Demo Page
Prints the demo page to check whether your
machine is printing properly or not.
Fax Send Confirmation Prints fax confirmation result.
System setup
277
3. Useful Setting Menus
13
Maintenance
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel.
Fax Sent
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
sent.
Fax Received
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
received.
Email Sent
Prints information on the emails you have
recently sent.
Fax Scheduled Jobs
Fax Schedule Jobs
Prints the document list currently stored for
delayed faxes along with the starting time and
type of each operation.
Network Configuration
Prints information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
PCL Font List Prints the PCL font list.
PS Font List Prints the PS/PS3 font list.
Usage Counter
Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the
total number of pages printed.
Fax Options Prints the information of a fax reports.
Account
This is only available when Job Accounting is
enabled from the SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service. You can print a report of printout counts
for each user.
Item Description
Item Description
CLR Empty Msg.
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You
can clear the empty message.
Supplies Life
Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the
supplies life" on page 107.)
Image Mar.
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color
registration, color density, etc.
TonerLow Alert
Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty
(see "Setting the toner low alert" on page 108).
Serial Number
Shows the machine’s serial number. When you call for
service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you
can find this.
System setup
278
3. Useful Setting Menus
14
Job manage
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press (Menu) > System Setup > Job Manage on the control panel.
Paper Stacking
If you use a machine in a humid area, or you are using the
damp print media caused by a high humidity, the print-
outs on the output tray may be curled and may not be
stacked properly. In this case, you can set the machine to
use this function to let print-outs be stacked firmly. But,
using this function will make the print speed slow.
Ram Disk Enables/disables Ram disk to manage jobs.
Item Description
Item Description
Active Job Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed.
Stored Job Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk.
Secured Job Shows the print job lists that are secured on the disk.
System setup
279
3. Useful Setting Menus
15
Address book setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book on the touch screen.
16
Document box
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Press Document Box > Next > select the menu item you want on the touch
screen.
Option Description
PhoneBook
Adds, views, prints or deletes the phone book list. You
also can create a group.
Email
Adds, views, prints or deletes the email list. You also can
create a group.
Print Prints the address book.
Reset
Resets the current address book.
Option Description
System Boxes Stores the printing data or prints the secure page.
Stored Print: Prints out the stored data without
entering password.
Secured Print: Prints out the stored data with
entering password.
Shared Folder Show the shared folders on your network and save your
jobs there.
System setup
280
3. Useful Setting Menus
17
Network setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings >
Network Settings (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 340).
Press (Menu)> System Setup> Network on the control panel,
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup on the touch
screen.
Option Description
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Selects the appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment (see
"Setting IP address" on page 181).
There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are
not sure, leave as is, or consult the network
administrator.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
Selects this option to use the network environment
through IPv6 (see "IPv6 configuration" on page 192).
Ethernet Speed
Configure the network transmission speed.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
802.1x
You can selects the user authentication for network
communication. For detailed information consult the
network administrator.
Wireless Selects this option to use the wireless network.
System setup
281
3. Useful Setting Menus
Clear Settings
Reverts the network settings to the default values.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Network
Configuration
This list shows information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
Net. Activate
Ethernet Activate
You can set whether to use Ethernet on or off.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Http Activate
You can set whether to use SyncThru™ Web Service or
not.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Option Description
WINS
You can configure the WINS server. WINS(Windows
Internet Name Service) is used in the Windows operating
system.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
SNMP V1/V2
You can set SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol). Administrator’s can use SNMP to monitor and
manage machines on the network.
SNTP
You can set SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
settings. SNTP synchronizes the clocks of the computer
systems through the Internet (NTP) so there would not be
a time difference when exchanging data.
UPnP(SSDP)
You can set UPNP protocol.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
MDNS
You can set mDNS (Multicast Domain Name System)
settings.
SetIP You can set SetIP settings.
Option Description
System setup
282
3. Useful Setting Menus
SLP
You can configure SLP (Service Location Protocol)
settings. This protocol allows host applications to find
services in a local area network without prior
configuration.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Option Description
283
3. Useful Setting Menus
Admin setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Press Setup > Admin Setup > Next on the touch screen.
Item Description
User Access
Control
You can control user access to a machine. You can assign
different levels of permissions to use the machine to each
user.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™
Web Service. Open the Web browser from your
networked computer and type the IP address of your
machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click
the Security tab > User Access Control (see
"Registering authorized users" on page 295).
Change Admin.
Password
Changes the machine’s password for accessing the Admin
Setup.
Firmware
Upgrade
To upgrade the latest firmware, turn this option "On" and
then download the firmware file.
Stamp Sets the stamp feature to access the Admin Setup menu.
284
3. Useful Setting Menus
Eco
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press Eco > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item Description
Eco-On
Select eco mode and change on/off or on-forced
option.
Settings
Sets eco-related settings and change default settings.
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the
default mode.
Feature Configuration: Select the Default mode or
Custom mode.
285
3. Useful Setting Menus
Direct USB
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press Direct USB > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item Description
Print From
Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file
to print.
Scan to USB
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals
and save the scanned image to a USB device.
File Manage
Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file
to delete. You can format the USB device.
Show Space Shows the remaining space.
4. Special Features
This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features.
Altitude adjustment 287
Storing email address 288
Entering various characters 290
Setting up the fax address book 291
Registering authorized users 295
Printing features 296
Scan features 313
Fax features 322
Using shared folder features 331
Using optional device features 332
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
287
4. Special Features
Altitude adjustment
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the
height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you
on how to set your machine for the best print quality.
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.
Normal: 0-1,000 m(3,280 ft)
High1: 1,000 m(3,280 ft)-2,000 m(6,561 ft)
High2: 2,000 m(6,561 ft)-3,000 m(9,842 ft)
High3: 3,000 m(9,842 ft)-4,000 m(13,123 ft)
High4: 4,000 m(13,123 ft)-5,000 m(16,404 ft)
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer
Manager program.
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
> (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see "Device
Settings" on page 347.
If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via
SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page
340).
You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine’s
display (see "Machine’s basic settings" on page 47).
288
4. Special Features
Storing email address
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
1
Storing on your machine
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up email
address using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
on page 340).
2
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
4
Click Address Book > Individual > Add.
5
Select the Speed No. and enter e-mail address and fax number.
If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB or FTP and set
the information.
6
Click Apply.
If you make a group,
1 Click Address Book > Group > Add Group.
2 Select the Speed No. and enter Group Name.
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add
individual(s) after this group is created.
3 Click Apply.
Storing email address
289
4. Special Features
2
Searching for an email address
Searching sequentially through memory
1
Select (scan) > (Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > All on the control panel.
Or select Scan to > (Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > All on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Email >
View List > Individual or Group on the touch screen.
2
Search through the entire memory in index (numerical) order, and select
the name and address you want.
Searching with a particular first letter
1
Select (scan) > (Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > ID on the control panel.
Or select Scan to > (Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > ID on the control panel.
2
Enter the first few letters of the name you want.
3
Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears.
290
4. Special Features
Entering various characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For
example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email
addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.
3
Entering alphanumeric characters
Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to
enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display
shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6. To find the letter that you
want to enter, see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290.
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.
To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or up/down arrow
button.
4
Keypad letters and numbers
Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you
are doing.
Key Assigned numbers, letters, or characters
1@ / . 1
2A B C a b c 2
3D E F d e f 3
4 G H I g h i 4
5J K L j k l 5
6M N O m n o 6
7P Q R S p q r s 7
8T U V t u v 8
9W X Y Z w x y z 9
0& + - , 0
* * % ^ _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ]
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
# # = | ? " : { } < > ;
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
291
4. Special Features
Setting up the fax address book
This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/C145xN/CLX-626xND (see
"Variety feature" on page 10).
You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
5
Registering a speed dial number
1
Select (fax) > (Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Individual > (options) > Add on the touch
screen.
2
Enter a speed dial number and press OK.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
number, press (Back).
3
Enter the name you want and press OK.
4
Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
5
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
6
Using speed dial numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax,
enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want.
For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the
corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2
seconds.
For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)
and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.
For CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW/CLX-626xFW,
1
Press Fax > Speed Dial Send or Group Dial Send > Next on the touch
screen.
2
Select the number you want.
3
Press Send.
Setting up the fax address book
292
4. Special Features
7
Editing speed dial numbers
1
Select (fax) > (Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Individual on the touch screen.
2
Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.
3
Change the name and press OK.
4
Change the fax number and press OK.
5
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
8
Registering a group dial number
1
Select (fax) > (Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next >Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Group> (options) > Add on the touch
screen.
2
Enter a group dial number and press OK.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
number, press (Back).
3
Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial’s name to put in
the group.
4
Select the name and number you want and press OK.
5
Select Yes when Add? appears.
6
Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.
7
When you have finished, select No when Another No.? appears and
press OK.
8
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Setting up the fax address book
293
4. Special Features
9
Editing group dial numbers
1
Select (fax) > (Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Group on the touch screen.
2
Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.
3
Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears.
Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?
appears.
4
Press OK to add or delete the number.
5
Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers.
6
Select No at the Another No.? and press OK.
7
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
10
Searching address book for an entry
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from
A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name
associated with the number.
1
Select ct (fax) > (Address Book) > Search & Dial > Speed Dial
or Group Dial on the control panel.
2
Enter All or ID and press OK.
3
Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter
you want to search.
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,” press the 6 button,
which is labeled with “MNO.”
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.
Setting up the fax address book
294
4. Special Features
11
Printing address book
You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.
1
Select ct (fax) > (Address Book) > Print on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Address Book on
the touch screen.
2
Press OK.
The machine begins printing.
295
4. Special Features
Registering authorized users
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
To send a scanned image, copy image, or fax data through email or via network
server safely, you must register account information of authorized users to your
local machine using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
on page 340).
2
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
4
Click Security > User Access Control > Authentication.
5
Select Basic Authentication in the Authentication Mode, and select
Local Authentication in the AA Method, and click.
6
Click Apply.
7
Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window.
8
Click User Profile > Add.
9
Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, Confirm Password, E-mail
Address, and Fax Number.
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s)
after this group is created.
10
Click Apply.
296
4. Special Features
Printing features
For basic printing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic printing"
on page 65).
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
12
Changing the default print settings
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
2
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
3
Right-click on your machine.
4
For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, select Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 7/8 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select
Printing preferences.
If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer drivers
connected to the selected printer.
5
Change the settings on each tab.
6
Click OK.
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing
Preferences.
Printing features
297
4. Special Features
13
Setting your machine as a default machine
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
2
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
3
Select your machine.
4
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default printer has a
, you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer.
Printing features
298
4. Special Features
14
Using advanced print features
XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format.
See "Features by model" on page 7.
The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or
higher.
Install optional memory when an XPS job does not print because the
printer is out of memory.
For models that provide XPS driver from the Samsung website, http://
www.samsung.com > find your product> Support or downloads.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
1
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.
2
Click Print.
3
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
For example, c:\Temp\file name.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My
Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are
using.
Printing features
299
4. Special Features
Understanding special printer features
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print
settings. The machine name that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Select the Help menu or click the button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"
on page 68).
Item Description
Multiple Pages per
Side
Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
Printing features
300
4. Special Features
Poster Printing
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets
together to form one poster-size document.
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab
to make it easier to paste the sheets together.
Booklet Printing
a
Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce
a booklet.
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what
paper sizes are available.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without or
mark).
Double-sided
Printing
Double-sided
Printing (Manual)
a
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.
You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of
the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.
Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the Double-sided Printing (Manual) option.
Item Description
8
9
Printing features
301
4. Special Features
Double-sided
Printing
Double-sided
Printing (Manual)
a
Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the machine.
None: Disables this feature.
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing. This option is not available when you
use Double-sided Printing (Manual).
Paper Options Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the
document.
Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
Item Description
Printing features
302
4. Special Features
Watermark
(Creating a
watermark)
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.
Watermark
(Editing a watermark)
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options.
d Click Update to save the changes.
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Watermark
(Deleting a
watermark)
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Overlay
a
This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver (see "Software" on page 8).
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document.
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.
Item Description
Printing features
303
4. Special Features
Overlay
a
(Creating a new page
overlay)
a To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.
c In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
d In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is
C:\Formover).
e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.
Overlay
a
(Using a page overlay)
a Click the Advanced tab.
b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you
want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay
List box.
d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a
document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Overlay
a
(Deleting a page
overlay)
a In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
b Select Edit in the Text drop down list.
c Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
d Click Delete.
e When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
Item Description
Printing features
304
4. Special Features
Print Mode
b
This feature is available only if you have installed the mass device or optional memory (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
You need to check Storage Options to use this feature (see "Setting Device Options" on page 103).
Without installing the mass storage device in the machine, the Ram Disk feature provides only 3 options: Normal, Proof, and
Confidential.
Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory.
- Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory.
- Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies later.
- Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print.
- Store: Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing.
- Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time.
- Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If you select this setting, the printer spools the document into the
mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue, decreasing the computer’s work load.
- Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time.
Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel.
User ID: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel. The user name automatically appears as the
user name that you use to log on Windows.
Enter Password: If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured, you have to enter the password for the document
box. This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel.
Confirm Password: Re-enter the password to confirm it.
Item Description
Printing features
305
4. Special Features
Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission.
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission can start a print job.
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group permission can start a print job.
Click the question mark( ) from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about.
Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru™ Web Service.
Job Encryption
c
Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects the printing information even though the data is snatched on
a network.
Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the mass storage device is installed. The mass storage device is used to decrypt the printing
data (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
a. This option is not available when you use XPS driver.
b. CLX-626x series only.
c. CLX-626xFW only.
Item Description
Printing features
306
4. Special Features
15
Using Direct Printing Utility
Available for Windows OS users only.
Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or
optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
What is Direct Printing Utility?
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your
machine to print without having to open the file.
To install this program:
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
Optional memory or mass storage device should be installed on your
machine, to print files using this program. (see "Variety feature" on page
10).
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing
restriction feature and retry printing.
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate
the password feature, and retry printing.
Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility
program depends on how the PDF file was created.
The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below.
For higher versions, you must open the file to print it.
Printing
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.
1
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Direct Printing Utility .
The Direct Printing Utility window appears.
2
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click
Browse.
3
Select the file you wish to print and click Open.
The file is added in the Select Files section.
4
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
5
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
Printing features
307
4. Special Features
Using the right-click menu
1
Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing.
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added.
2
Select the machine to use.
3
Customize the machine settings.
4
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
16
Mac printing
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Printing a document
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver settings in each
application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:
1
Open the document to print.
2
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some
applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.
4
Open the File menu and click Print.
5
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
6
Click Print.
Printing features
308
4. Special Features
Changing printer settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties
window is similar to the following.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.
1
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
on one sheet of paper.
3
Select the other options to use.
4
Click Print.
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet
of paper.
Printing on both sides of the paper
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page
10).
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding
your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book
binding.
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
1
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.
2
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
3
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.
4
Select the other options to use.
5
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper
when you are printing more than 1 copy.
Printing features
309
4. Special Features
Using help
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information
about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.
17
Linux printing
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Printing from applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such
application.
1
Open the document to print.
2
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Print Setup for some
applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click Apply.
4
Open the File menu and click Print.
5
Select your machine to print.
6
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
Printing features
310
4. Special Features
7
Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary.
8
Click Print.
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Printing files
You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standard
CUPS directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows
you to do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
"lp -d <printer name> -o <option> <file name>"
Please refer to lp or lpr man page on your system for more details.
Configuring Printer Properties
You can change the default printing options or connection type with Printing
utility supplied by the OS.
1
Launch Printing utility(Go to System > Administration > Printing
menu or execute "system-config-printer" command in Terminal
program).
2
Select your printer and double-click it.
3
Change default printing options or connection type.
4
Click Apply button.
Printing features
311
4. Special Features
18
Unix printing
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Features by model" on
page 7).
Proceeding the print job
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, or PS files to print.
1
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.
For example, if you are printing “document1
printui document1
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the
user can select various print options.
2
Select a printer that has been already added.
3
Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.
4
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,
press Properties.
5
Press OK to start the print job.
Changing the machine settings
The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various
print options in printer Properties.
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A” for Apply,
and “C” for Cancel.
General tab
Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according
to your requirements.
Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box
are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto
Selection.
Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.
Printing features
312
4. Special Features
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing.
Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.
Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline,
Double-line hairline)
Image tab
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your
document.
Text tab
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
Margins tab
Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not
enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in
the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size
selected.
Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.
Printer-Specific Settings tab
Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various
settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.
313
4. Special Features
Scan features
For basic scanning features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic scanning"
on page 77).
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending
on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan
at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.
19
Basic scanning method
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 10).
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network.
The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned
data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see
"Basic Scanning" on page 77).
TWAIN: TWAIN is one of the a preset imaging applications. Scanning an
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the
network connection (see "Scanning from image editing program" on page
318).
Samsung Easy Document Creator: You can use this program to scan
images or documents. We recommend using scan features with the
Samsung Easy Document Creator program provided in the supplied
sofware CD.
- See "Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 344.
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your
computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable
(see "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 318).
USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto
an USB memory device.
Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment (See
"Scanning to email" on page 315).
FTP/SMB: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP/SMB server (see
"Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 317).
Scan features
314
4. Special Features
20
Setting the scan settings in the computer
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager (see "Using Samsung Easy
Printer Manager" on page 345).
2
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
3
Select Scan to PC Settings menu.
4
Select the option you want.
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on
the device.
Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device
settings.
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
5
Press Save > OK.
21
Scanning from network connected machine
This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the
network interface (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD,
since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver
locally" on page 32).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select (Scan) > Scan To PC > Network PC on the control panel.
Or select Scan > Network PC on the touch screen.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
3
Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if
necessary.
Scan features
315
4. Special Features
ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy
Printer Manager > Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC
Settings.
4
Select the option you want and press OK.
5
Scanning begins.
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
22
Scanning to email
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
Setting up an email account
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
on page 340).
2
Select Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).
3
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
4
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
5
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
authentication.
6
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
7
Press Apply.
Scan features
316
4. Special Features
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a
check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication.
Enter the IP address and port number.
Scanning and sending an email
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select (scan) > Scan To Email on the control panel.
Or select Scan > Send Email on the touch screen.
3
Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru™ Web
Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 340).
4
Enter the sender’s and recipient’s email address.
You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self
option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-mail on SyncThru™ Web Service.
5
Enter an email subject and press OK.
6
Select the file format to scan, and press OK.
7
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
8
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.
Scan features
317
4. Special Features
23
Scanning to FTP/SMB server
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
Setting up an FTP/SMB server
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
on page 340).
2
Select Address Book > Individual > Add.
3
Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB.
4
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
5
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
6
Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits the access
of unauthorized people.
7
Enter the login name and password.
8
Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain,
otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB
server.
9
Enter the path for saving the scanned image.
The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root.
The folder properties need to be setup as a share.
Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder.
10
Press Apply.
Scanning and sending to FTP/SMB server
1
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
Select (scan) > Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP on the control panel.
Or select Scan > SMB or FTP on the touch screen.
4
Select a server and scan format you want.
5
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the
specified server.
Scan features
318
4. Special Features
24
Scanning from image editing program
You can scan and import documents in the image editing software such as
Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below
to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
4
Click File > Import, and select the scanner device.
5
Set the scan options.
6
Scan and save your scanned image.
25
Scanning using the WIA driver
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft
Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN
driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using
additional software:
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
4
Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan.
5
New Scan application appears.
6
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your
preferences affect the picture.
7
Scan and save your scanned image.
Scan features
319
4. Special Features
26
Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
Availabe for Windows OS users only.
Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator.
Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you
install the machine software (see "Using Samsung Easy Document
Creator" on page 344).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs.
3
Click Samsung Printers, and start Samsung Easy Document Creator.
Click Scan ( ) from the home screen.
4
Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start.
5
Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options).
6
Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview
image.
7
Select to Save to Location, Send to E-mail, or Send to SNS.
8
Click on Save (Saving a Scan), Send ( E-mailing a Scan), or Share
(Uploading).
If there is room on the document glass, more than one item can be scanned
at the same time. Use the tool to make multiple selection areas.
Scan features
320
4. Special Features
27
Mac scanning
Scanning from USB connected machine
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
4
Select the option you want.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest
version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
Scanning from network connected machine
Network or wireless model only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
4
According to OS, follow steps below.
For 10.4
-Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
- Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use
TWAIN software checkbox is checked.
- Click Connect.
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port,
or If TWAIN UI appears, click Change Port.. from the Preference
tab and select a new port.
For 10.5
-Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
- Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your
machine in Bonjour Devices.
Scan features
321
4. Special Features
- If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps
above.
For 10.6 -10.9, select your device below SHARED.
5
Set the scan options on this program.
6
Scan and save your scanned image.
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the
latest version. Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X 10.4.7 or
higher.
For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.
You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
•You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software. Open the
Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Scan Assistant.
28
Linux scanning
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Launch a scan application such as xsane or simple-scan(If it's not
installed, please install it manually to use scan features. For example, you
may use "yum install xsane" for rpm package systems and "apt-get install
xsane" for deb package systems to install xsane).
3
Select your device from the list and set the scan options to apply.
4
Click the Scan button.
322
4. Special Features
Fax features
For basic faxing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic faxing" on
page 78).
This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/C145xN/CLX-626xND (see
"Control panel overview" on page 26).
29
Automatic redialing
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send
a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on
the country's factory default setting.
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press (Start) button to redial the
number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press (Stop or
Stop/Clear) button.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts.
1
Press (fax) > (Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control
panel.
2
Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want.
3
Select the option you want.
30
Redialing the fax number
1
Press (Redial/Pause) button on the control panel.
2
Select the fax number you want.
Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.
3
When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine
automatically begins to send.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,
select No when Another Page? appears.
31
Confirming a transmission
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine
beeps and returns to ready mode.
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears
on the display. If you receive an error message, press (Stop or Stop/Clear)
to clear the message and try to send the fax again.
Fax features
323
4. Special Features
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
time sending a fax is completed. Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Setup
> Sending > Fax Confirmation on the control panel.
32
Sending a fax in the computer
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer
driver.
1
Open the document to be sent.
2
Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
3
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window
4
Click Print or OK.
5
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option
Select the Help menu or click the button from the window and click on
any option you want to know about.
6
Click Send.
33
Delaying a fax transmission
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Press (fax) on the control panel.
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.
4
Press (Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel.
Or select Fax > Delayed Send on the touch screen.
5
Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
6
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
Fax features
324
4. Special Features
7
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat
steps 5.
You can add up to 10 destinations.
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group
dial numbers anymore.
8
Enter the job name and the time.
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time
on the following day.
9
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.
You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.
Press (Menu) > System Setup > Report > Fax Scheduled Jobs on the
control panel.
Canceling a reserved fax job
1
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the control
panel.
2
Select the fax job you want and press OK.
3
Press OK when Yes highlights.
The selected fax is deleted from memory.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.
34
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,
this feature may be useful.
When you forward a fax by an email, you must first set the mail server and
IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web
Service" on page 340).
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in
grayscale.
Fax features
325
4. Special Features
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Feature > Send Forward > Forward
to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Send Forward
> Forward to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch
screen.
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
3
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and
press OK.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
35
Forwarding a received fax
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,
this feature may be useful.
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale.
1
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or Forward to
Server on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive
Forward > Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or
Forward to Server on the touch screen.
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward&Print.
2
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and
press OK.
3
Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
Fax features
326
4. Special Features
36
Sending faxes on both sides of paper
This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Press (fax) > Fax Feature > Duplex on the control panel.
Or select Fax > Select the menu you want > Select Duplex from the sub-
menus > on the touch screen.
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one isde only.
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the
back is rotated 180°.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the originals on the DADF. If the
machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it automatically changes
the option to 1 Sided.
3
Press OK.
37
Receiving a fax in the computer
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
To use this feature, set the option on the control panel:
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
Forward to PC > Forward the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive
Forward > Forward to PC > Forward on the touch screen.
1
Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
2
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
3
Select Fax to PC Settings menu.
4
Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings.
Image Type: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF.
Save Location: Select location to save the converted faxes.
Prefix: Select prefix.
Print received fax: Set to print information for the received fax after
receiving the fax.
Fax features
327
4. Special Features
Notify me when complete: Set to show the popup window to
notify receiving a fax.
Open with default application: After receiving the fax, open it with
default application.
None: After receiving a fax, the machine does not notify the user or
opens the application.
5
Press Save > OK.
38
Changing the receive modes
1
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Mode
on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax
Default > Common > Receive Mode on the touch screen.
2
Select the option you want.
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax
reception mode.
Tel: Receives a fax by pressing (On Hook Dial) and then
(Start) button.
Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine is attached to your
machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine
senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to
Fax mode to receive the fax.
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket
on the back of your machine.
DRPD: You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 328.
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
3
Press OK.
4
Press (Stop/Clear) button or home( ) icon to return to ready
mode.
Fax features
328
4. Special Features
39
Receiving manually in Tel mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing (On Hook Dial) button and then
pressing (Start) when you hear a fax tone. If your machine has a handset,
you can answer calls using the handset (see "Features by model" on page 7).
40
Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on
the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine
stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine
is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket,
your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined
number of rings.
If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the
machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering
machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.
41
Receiving faxes with an extension telephone
When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket, you
can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone,
without going to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the
keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you
want.
While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket, copy
and scan features are not available.
42
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
This setting may not be available depending on your country. Distinctive Ring is
a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone
line to answer several different telephone numbers. This feature is often used by
answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need
to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.
Fax features
329
4. Special Features
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
1
Select (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive
Mode > DRPD on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax
Default > Common > Receive Mode > DRPD on the touch screen.
2
Call your fax number from another telephone.
3
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine
requires several rings to learn the pattern.
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.
4
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2.
DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect
the machine to another telephone line.
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the
machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different
number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.
43
Receiving in secure receiving mode
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes
go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes by entering the password.
To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from (fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > On on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive on
the touch screen.
Printing received faxes
1
Select (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > Print
on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive
> Print on the touch screen.
2
Enter a four-digit password and press OK.
3
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.
Fax features
330
4. Special Features
44
Printing faxes on both sides of the paper
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Press (fax) > (Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Duplex Print
on the control panel.
Off: Prints in Normal mode.
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.
3
Press OK.
4
Press (Stop/Clear)button to return to ready mode.
45
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing,
your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be
processed at the same time.
2
5
3
331
4. Special Features
Using shared folder features
This feature allows you to use the machine’s memory as a shared folder. The
advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder
through your computer’s window.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device
(see "Variety feature" on page 10).
The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user’ s
access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users.
46
Creating a shared folder
1
Open the Windows Explore window from the computer.
2
Enter the printer’s \\[ip address] (example: \\169.254.133.42) in
the address field, and press the Enter key or click Go.
3
Create a new folder under nfsroot directory.
47
Using the shared folder
You can use the shared folder exactly like the normal computer. Create, edit and
delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You also store the scanned
data in the shared folder. You can directly print files stored on a the shared
folder. You can print TIFF, JPEG and PRN files.
332
4. Special Features
Using optional device features
CLX-626x series only.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page
10).
48
From the printer driver
If you install the optional device, you can use advanced printing features, such
as proofing a job and printing a private job in the Print window. Check the mass
storage or RAM disk option in Device Options, then you can select the various
features from Print Mode (see "Setting Device Options" on page 103).
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
3
Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list.
4
Click Properties or Preferences .
5
Click the each tab then select Print Mode.
6
Select the option you want (see "Understanding special printer features"
on page 299).
7
Select OK.
Using optional device features
333
4. Special Features
49
From the control panel
If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive, you can use
these features from the (Menu) button> System Setup > Job Manage..
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Active Job: All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active
job queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job
from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.
Secured Job: You can print or delete a secured job. Shows the list of secured
jobs the user has set in the printer driver. You need to enter the user name
and password set in the printer driver.
Stored Job: You can print or delete a stored job.
File Policy: You can choose the file policy for generating file name before
you proceed with the job through optional memory. If the optional memory
already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can
rename or overwrite it.
5. Useful Management
Tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
Accessing management tools 335
Easy Capture Manager 336
Samsung Easy Color Manager 337
Samsung AnyWeb Print 338
Easy Eco Driver 339
Using SyncThru™ Web Service 340
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 344
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 345
Using Samsung Printer Status 348
Using Samsung Printer Experience 350
335
5. Useful Management Tools
Accessing management tools
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Apps.
3
Find Samsung Printers.
4
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.
5
Click the management tool you want to use.
After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start menu > Programs or All Programs.
For Windows 8, after installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.
336
5. Useful Management Tools
Easy Capture Manager
Available for Windows OS users only.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key. Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited.
337
5. Useful Management Tools
Samsung Easy Color Manager
Samsung Easy Color Manager helps users do fine adjustments with 6 color tones and other properties, such as brightness, contrast, and saturation. Color tone change
can be saved as a profile and can be used from the driver or from inside of the machine.
Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
338
5. Useful Management Tools
Samsung AnyWeb Print
Available for Windows OS users only.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
339
5. Useful Management Tools
Easy Eco Driver
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing. To use this application, Printer Properties > Basic tab > Start Easy Eco
Driver before printing job checkbox should be checked.
If you did not check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the printer properties but want to use Easy Eco Driver, select Eco Printing Preview in
the Favorites tab each time you print.
Easy Eco Driver also allows you to do simple editing such as removing images and texts and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset.
How to use:
1 Open a document to print.
2 Print the document.
A preview window appears.
3 Select the options you want to apply to the document.
You can see the preview of the applied features.
4 Click Print.
340
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
SyncThru™ Web Service.
SyncThru™ Web Service explanation in this user’s guide may differ from
your machine depending on its options or models.
Network model only (see "Software" on page 8).
1
Accessing SyncThru™ Web Service
1
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an
administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but
you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab.
1
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
2
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
341
5. Useful Management Tools
2
SyncThru™ Web Service overview
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.
Information tab
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check
things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an
error report.
Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their
severity.
Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in
the cartridge.
Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and
duplex.
Current Settings: Shows the machine’s and network’s information.
Security Information: Shows the machine’s security information.
Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail
address, and font reports.
Settings tab
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine.
Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets
options such as TCP/IP and network protocols.
Security tab
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to
log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
System Security: Sets the system administrator’s information and also
enables or disables machine features.
Network Security: Sets settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x,
and Authentication servers.
User Access Control: Classifies users into several groups according to each
user’s role. Each user’s authorization, authentication and accounting will be
controlled by the group’s role definition.
System Log: The System Log contains settings related to logs of device
events.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
342
5. Useful Management Tools
CLX-626xFW only.
- Log Configuration: The Log Configuration section contains settings
related to saving logs.
- Log Viewer: The Log Viewer section contains options to view logs
stored locally on the device.
Maintenance tab
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.
Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machine’s firmware.
Contact Information: Shows the contact information.
Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check
information.
License Management: License Management provides settings for installed
applications and application licenses.
Cloning: You can import or export (transfer) various settings (machine
setting, network information, address book, etc.) between devices that have
the Cloning feature in SyncThru™ Web Service.
3
E-mail notification setup
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By
setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP
server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine
error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be
used more frequently by a machine administrator.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3
From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification.
If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings >
Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network
environment before setting e-mail notification.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
343
5. Useful Management Tools
4
Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification.
5
Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.
Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items
you want to receive an alert for.
6
Click Apply.
If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that
case, contact a network administrator.
4
Setting the system administrator’s information
This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3
From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator
4
Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email
address.
5
Click Apply.
344
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These
documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a
student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom
sharing scanned pictures from last year’s birthday party, Samsung Easy
Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools.
The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features below:
Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures.
Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents with text or text and
images.
Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an
editable text format.
Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner.
SNS Upload: Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or
existing images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS).
E-Book Conversion: Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as
one e-book or convert existing files into an e-book format.
Plug-in: Scan, fax, and convert to E-Book directly from the Microsoft Office
program.
Click the Help ( ) button from the window and click on any option you
want to know about.
345
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Software" on page 8).
Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung
machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.
5
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
For Mac,
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer
Manager.
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic
sections as described in the table that follows:
The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are
using.
1
Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your
computer and network printers added by network
discovery (Windows only).
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
346
5. Useful Management Tools
Select the Help menu or click the button from the window and click on
any option you want to know about.
2
Printer
information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the machine’s
model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine
status.
You can view the online User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs.
You can directly open the necessary section in the
user’s guide.
3
Application
information
Includes links for changing to the advanced settings
(switching UI), refresh, preference setting, summary, help,
and about.
The button is used to change the user
interface to the advanced settings user interface
(see "Advanced settings user interface overview"
on page 347).
4
Quick links Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This
section also includes links to applications in the advanced
settings.
If you connect your machine to a network, the
SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.
5
Contents area Displays information about the selected machine,
remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary
based on the machine selected. Some machines do not
have this feature.
6
Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering
window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)
from online.
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
347
5. Useful Management Tools
6
Advanced settings user interface overview
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible
for managing the network and machines.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Device Settings
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper,
layout, emulation, network, and print information.
Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the
device.
Basic tab: Contains general scan and device settings.
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Fax to PC Settings
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected
device.
Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.
Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and
allows more options to be set.
Alert Settings (Windows only)
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.
Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.
Job Accounting
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting
software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.
348
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Status
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the
machine status.
The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.
Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine
(see "Specifications" on page 144).
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
7
Samsung Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install
the machine software.
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
Icon Mean Description
Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no
errors or warnings.
Warning The machine is in a state where an error might occur in
the future. For example, it might be in toner low status,
which may lead to toner empty status.
Error The machine has at least one error.
1
Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in each
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
2 Option You can set printing job alert related settings.
Using Samsung Printer Status
349
5. Useful Management Tools
3
Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from
online.
4
User’s Guide You can view the online User’s Guide.
This button opens the Troubleshooting
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly
open the troubleshooting section in the
user’s guide.
5 Close Close the window.
350
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit
Samsung’s web site, and check connected machine information. This
application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the
machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection.
8
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
To open the application,
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience () tile.
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as
described in the following table:
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.
1
Printer
Information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining
toner level.
1
2
6
3
4
5
Using Samsung Printer Experience
351
5. Useful Management Tools
9
Adding/Deleting Printers
If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if
you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below.
You can only add/delete network connected printers.
Adding a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
Select Add Printer
3
Select the printer you want to add.
You can see the added printer.
If you see mark, you can also click mark to add printers.
2 User Guide You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide
when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
3
Order
Supplies
Click on this button to order replacement toner
cartridges online. You need to be connected to the
Internet to use this feature.
4
Visit Samsung Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
5
Printer Settings You can configure various machine settings such as
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking,
and print information through SyncThru™ Web Service.
Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This
button will be disabled if your machine is connected via
USB cable.
6
Device List &
Latest Scanned
Image
The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung
Printer Experience. Under the device, you can see the
latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be
connected to a network to scan from here.
This section is for the users with multi-functional
printers.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
352
5. Useful Management Tools
Deleting a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
Select Remove Printer
3
Select the printer you want to delete.
4
Click Yes.
You can see that the deleted printer is removed from the screen.
10
Printing from Windows 8
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.
Basic printing
1
Open the document to print.
2
From the Charms, select Devices.
3
Select your printer from the list
4
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
353
5. Useful Management Tools
5
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Cancelling a print job
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
( ) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing (Stop/Clear) button on
the control panel.
Opening more settings
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or
options.
You can set up more printing parameters.
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
From the Charms, select Devices.
3
Select your printer from the list
4
Click More settings.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
354
5. Useful Management Tools
Basic tab
Basic
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,
orientation, and document type.
Eco settings
This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.
Advanced tab
Paper settings
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Layout settings
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
355
5. Useful Management Tools
Security tab
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If
this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that these features are not
supported.
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
Confidential Printing
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a
password to print using it.
11
Scanning from Windows 8
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that
can be stored on your computer.
Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience
The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.
3
Click Scan ().
4
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and
resolution.
5
Click Prescan ( )to check the image.
6
Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
rotate and mirror.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
356
5. Useful Management Tools
7
Click Scan ( )and save the image.
When you place the originals in the ADF (or DADF), Prescan () is not
available.
You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.
6. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
Paper feeding problems 358
Power and cable connecting problems 359
Printing problems 360
Printing quality problems 364
Copying problems 372
Scanning problems 373
Faxing problems 375
Operating system problems 377
For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings, refer to the
troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless
network" on page 234).
358
6. Troubleshooting
Paper feeding problems
Condition Suggested solutions
Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam.
Paper sticks together. Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.
Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper.
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.
Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.
Paper does not feed into the machine. Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
The paper keeps jamming. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the
manual feeding in tray.
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris.
Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
359
6. Troubleshooting
Power and cable connecting problems
Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems.
Condition Suggested solutions
The machine is not receiving power,
or the connection cable between the
computer and the machine is not
connected properly.
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a (Power/Wake Up) button on the control,
press it.
Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.
360
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
The machine does not
print.
The machine is not receiving power.
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a (Power/
Wake Up) button on the control, press it.
The machine is not selected as the default
machine.
Select your machine as your default machine in Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
The cover is not closed. Close the cover.
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 123).
No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the tray" on page 50).
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable between the computer and
the machine is not connected properly.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 25).
The connection cable between the computer and
the machine is defective.
If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job.
You can also try using a different machine cable.
The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to
the correct one.
Printing problems
361
6. Troubleshooting
The machine does not
print.
The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.
The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Uninstall and reinstall the machine’s driver.
The machine is malfunctioning. Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a service representative.
The document size is so big that the hard disk
space of the computer is insufficient to access the
print job.
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.
The output tray is full. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.
The machine selects print
materials from the wrong
paper source.
The paper option that was selected in the
Printing Preferences may be incorrect.
For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab
within the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on
page 68).
A print job is extremely
slow.
The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.
Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 67). See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on page 68).
The paper size and the paper size settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.
Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection
in the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 67).
The machine prints, but
the text is wrong,
garbled, or incomplete.
The machine cable is loose or defective. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already
printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer
that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable.
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
Printing problems
362
6. Troubleshooting
The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.
The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application.
The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again.
Pages print, but they are
blank.
The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary.
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.
See "Redistributing toner" on page 96.
See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98.
The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Some parts, such as the controller or the board,
may be defective.
Contact a service representative.
The machine does not
print PDF files correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image
from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
The print quality of
photos is not good.
Images are not clear.
The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
Before printing, the
machine emits vapor near
the output tray.
Using damp/wet paper can cause vapor [white
smoke] during printing.
This is not a problem, just keep printing. If you are bothered by the smoke [vapor], then
replace the paper with fresh paper from an unopened ream.
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
Printing problems
363
6. Troubleshooting
The machine does not
print special-sized paper,
such as billing paper.
Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
The printed billing paper
is curled.
The paper type setting does not match. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,
and set type to Thin (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
364
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition Suggested solutions
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 98).
The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn
the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.
A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine
(see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
109). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
The top half of the paper is
printed lighter than the rest of
the paper
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
Printing quality problems
365
6. Troubleshooting
Toner specks The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.
The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper.
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening
printing preferences" on page 67).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
White Spots If white spots appear on the page:
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be
dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Condition Suggested solutions
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBb
C
AaBb
C
AaBb
C
AaBb
C
AaBb
C
Printing quality problems
366
6. Troubleshooting
Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and
install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
109). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Black or color background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
Change to a lighter weight paper.
Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount
of background shading.
Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 96).
Toner smear Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
Check the paper type and quality.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
Condition Suggested solutions
Printing quality problems
367
6. Troubleshooting
Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after
a few more pages.
The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.
The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much moisture.
If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams
on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems.
Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application
or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.
If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 96).
Toner particles are around bold
characters or pictures
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging
can occur causing this copy quality problem.
Condition Suggested solutions
A
Printing quality problems
368
6. Troubleshooting
Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper.
Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality.
Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.
Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl.
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Condition Suggested solutions
A
aBb
C
AaBb
C
AaBb
C
AaBb
Cc
A
aBbC
c
Printing quality problems
369
6. Troubleshooting
Wrinkles or creases Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality.
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
Solid color or black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 98).
The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
Condition Suggested solutions
A
Printing quality problems
370
6. Troubleshooting
Loose toner Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
Check the paper type, thickness, and quality.
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Character voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.
The paper may not meet paper specifications.
Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 98).
If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
Condition Suggested solutions
A
Printing quality problems
371
6. Troubleshooting
Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Change the printer’s paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
An unknown image
repetitively appears on a few
sheets
Loose toner
Light print or contamination
occurs
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see
"Altitude adjustment" on page 287).
Condition Suggested solutions
372
6. Troubleshooting
Copying problems
Condition Suggested solutions
Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page
72).
Smears, lines, marks, or spots
appear on copies.
If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies.
If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 113).
Copy image is skewed. Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide.
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
Blank copies print out. Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder.
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Image rubs off the copy easily. Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper jams
occur.
Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if
necessary.
Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge produces fewer
copies than expected before
running out of toner.
Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.
Turn the machine off and back on.
373
6. Troubleshooting
Scanning problems
Condition Suggested solutions
The scanner does not work. Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see
"Loading originals" on page 61).
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works.
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.
Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace
the printer cable.
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).
The unit scans very slowly. Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned
image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how
to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.
Scanning problems
374
6. Troubleshooting
Message appears on your
computer screen:
Device can’t be set to the H/W
mode you want.
Port is being used by another
program.
•Port is disabled.
Scanner is busy receiving or
printing data. When the
current job is completed, try
again.
Invalid handle.
Scanning has failed.
There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.
The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.
Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.
The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
Condition Suggested solutions
375
6. Troubleshooting
Faxing problems
Condition Suggested solutions
The machine is not working,
there is no display, or the
buttons are not working.
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.
Ensure that the power is turned on.
No dial tone. Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 25).
Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in memory
do not dial correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list.
The original does not feed into
the machine.
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick
or thin.
Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.
The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative (see "Available maintenance parts" on
page 93).
Faxes are not received
automatically.
The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 327).
Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.
The machine does not send. Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.
Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank
spaces or is of poor-quality.
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your machine by making a copy.
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 98).
Faxing problems
376
6. Troubleshooting
Some of the words on an
incoming fax are stretched.
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.
There are lines on the originals
you sent.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 113).
The machine dials a number,
but the connection with the
other fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and
ask them to solve the problem on their side.
Faxes do not store in memory. There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.
Blank areas appear at the
bottom of each page or on
other pages, with a small strip
of text at the top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.
Condition Suggested solutions
377
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
1
Common Windows problems
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.
Condition Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection Fault”,
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error occurred”
message appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready
mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Samsung Printer Experience is
not shown when you click more
settings.
Samsung Printer Experience is not installed. Download the app from the Windows Store and install it.
Machine information is not
displayed when you click the
device in the Devices and
Printers.
Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
(Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties)
If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.
Operating system problems
378
6. Troubleshooting
2
Common Mac problems
Refer to the Mac User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages.
Condition Suggested solutions
The machine does not print PDF files
correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or
illustrations are missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
Some letters are not displayed normally
during cover page printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on
the cover page.
When printing a document in Mac with
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.
Operating system problems
379
6. Troubleshooting
3
Common Linux problems
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
Condition Suggested solutions
There is no xsane nor simple-scan
application on my Linux machine.
For some Linux distributions, there might be no default scan application. To use scan features, install one of scan applications
using download center supplied by the OS(ex. Ubuntu Software Center for Ubuntu, Install/Remove Software for openSUSE,
Software for Fedora).
Scanner can not be found via network. For some Linux distributions, strong firewall is enabled and it may block our installer from opening the necessary port for
searching network devices. In such a case, open the snmp port - 22161 manually or disable the firewall temporarily while
using the device.
When printing more than one copy, the
second copy does not print.
The problem occurs on Ubuntu 12.04 due to the problem in standard CUPS filter 'pdftops'. Update 'cups-filters' package to
version 1.0.18 to fix the problem ('pdftops' is a part of 'cups-filters' package).
Unchecking the collate option in the
Print Dialog does not work.
For some distributions, GNOME Print Dialog has an issue handling the collate option. As workaround, set the default value
of collate option to False using the system's printing utility(execute "system-config-printer" in the Terminal program).
Printing always works with duplex. This duplex issue was in Ubuntu 9.10 CUPS package. Update CUPS version to 1.4.1-5ubuntu2.2.
Printer is not added through system's
printing utility.
The problem occurs on Debian 7 due to the defect in 'system-config-printer' package of the Debian 7 (http://
bugs.debian.org/cgi-bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=662813 in Debian bug tracking system). Please use another way to add printer
(CUPS WebUI for example)
Paper size and orientation are disabled
in the Print Dialog when opening text
files.
The problem occurs on Fedora 19 and it's related to 'leafpad' text editor on Fedora 19. Please use other text editors like
'gedit'.
Operating system problems
380
6. Troubleshooting
4
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used.
Problem Possible cause Solution
The PostScript file cannot be
printed
The PostScript driver may not be installed
correctly.
Install the PostScript driver (see "Software Installation" on page 174).
Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for
printing.
If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex. You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.
A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript. Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software
application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.
The optional tray is not
selected in the driver
The printer driver has not been configured to
recognize the optional tray.
Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the
tray option (see "Setting Device Options" on page 103).
When printing a document in
Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or
higher, colors print incorrectly
The resolution setting in the printer driver may
not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in
Acrobat Reader.
Quick Guide for Windows 8
User
This chapter will outline features specific to the Windows 8 OS. This chapter applies to users running Windows 8.
Understanding the screen 382
System requirements 383
Installing the driver locally 384
Installing the driver over the network 386
Installing the driver over the wireless network 388
Uninstalling the driver 390
Using Samsung Printer Experience 391
Accessing management tools 398
Installing accessories 399
Troubleshooting 400
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or interface in use.
Since this guide has been prepared based on Windows 8, some of the instructions may differ
depending on the version. It may also be modified without prior notice.
382
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Understanding the screen
Windows 8 provides both the new Start screen mode and the Desktop screen mode of the existing OS.
Start Screen Desktop Screen
383
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
System requirements
Operating
system
Requirement (recommended)
CPU RAM
Free HDD
Space
Windows
®
8 Intel
®
Pentium
®
IV 1 GHz 32-bit
or 64-bit processor or higher
1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB
Support for DirectX
®
9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to
enable the Aero theme).
•DVD-R/W Drive
384
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Installing the driver locally
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable.
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or downloads.
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
1
From the Start Screen
1
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered
on.
2
Make sure that the machine is powered on.
3
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable.
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop
Screen" on page 385).
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
Installing the driver locally
385
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
2
From the Desktop Screen
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the
installed driver from the Start screen.
1
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
2
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
3
Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then,
click Next.
4
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install
Window.
386
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Installing the driver over the network
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Machine that do not support networking will not be able to use this
feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,
www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads.
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
3
From the Start Screen
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 181).
2
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
3
Click Add a device.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
4
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s
control panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 229).
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop
Screen" on page 385).
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
5
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
Installing the driver over the network
387
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
4
From the Desktop Screen
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the
installed driver from the Start screen.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 181).
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
Then, click Next.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
388
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Installing the driver over the wireless network
Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,
www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads.
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
You must set up for wireless network using the supplied software CD in
Desktop screen mode.
If you are using a computer without a CD-ROM, you can set up the
wireless network from the machine’s control panel (see "Wireless
network setup" on page 195).
5
From the Start Screen
1
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application.
2
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
3
Click Add a device.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
4
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see "Printing a
network configuration report" on page 229).
5
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop
Screen" on page 385).
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
Installing the driver over the wireless network
389
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
6
From the Desktop Screen
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the
installed driver from the Start screen.
1
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
Then, click Next.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
For wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the wireless network setup
chapter (see "Wireless network setup" on page 195)
390
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Uninstalling the driver
7
From the Start Screen
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start
screen.
3
Follow the instructions in the window.
If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, unintstall from the
desktop screen mode (see "From the Desktop Screen" on page 390).
If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.
8
From the Desktop Screen
1
From Charms, select Search > Apps.
2
Search and click Control Panel.
3
Click Programs and Features.
4
Right-click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
5
Follow the instructions in the window.
391
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit
Samsung’s web site, and check connected machine information. This
application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the
machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection.
9
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
To open the application,
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience () tile.
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as
described in the following table:
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.
1
Printer
Information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining
toner level.
1
2
6
3
4
5
Using Samsung Printer Experience
392
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
10
Adding/Deleting Printers
If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if
you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below.
You can only add/delete network connected printers.
Adding a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
Select Add Printer
3
Select the printer you want to add.
You can see the added printer.
If you see mark, you can also click mark to add printers.
2 User Guide You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide
when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
3
Order
Supplies
Click on this button to order replacement toner
cartridges online. You need to be connected to the
Internet to use this feature.
4
Visit Samsung Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
5
Printer Settings You can configure various machine settings such as
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking,
and print information through SyncThru™ Web Service.
Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This
button will be disabled if your machine is connected via
USB cable.
6
Device List &
Latest Scanned
Image
The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung
Printer Experience. Under the device, you can see the
latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be
connected to a network to scan from here.
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
393
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Deleting a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
Select Remove Printer
3
Select the printer you want to delete.
4
Click Yes.
You can see that the deleted printer is removed from the screen.
11
Printing from Windows 8
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.
Basic printing
1
Open the document to print.
2
From the Charms, select Devices.
3
Select your printer from the list
4
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
394
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
5
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Cancelling a print job
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
( ) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing (Cancel or Stop/Clear)
button on the control panel.
Opening more settings
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or
options.
You can set up more printing parameters.
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
From the Charms, select Devices.
3
Select your printer from the list
4
Click More settings.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
395
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Basic tab
Basic
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,
orientation, and document type.
Eco settings
This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.
Advanced tab
Paper settings
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Layout settings
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
396
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Security tab
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If
this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that these features are not
supported.
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
Confidential Printing
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a
password to print using it.
Using the sharing feature
Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications
installed on the computer using the sharing feature.
This feature is only available for printing jpeg, bmp, tiff, gif, and png file
formats.
1
Select the content you want to print from other application.
2
From the Charms, select Share > Samsung Printer Experience .
3
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
4
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Using Samsung Printer Experience
397
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
12
Scanning from Windows 8
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that
can be stored on your computer.
Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience
The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.
3
Click Scan ().
4
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and
resolution.
5
Click Prescan ( )to check the image.
6
Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
rotate and mirror.
7
Click Scan ( )and save the image.
When you place the originals in the ADF(or DADF), Prescan ( ) is
not available.
You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.
398
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Accessing management tools
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers. For
more information on each tool, refer to "Useful Management Tools" on page
334.
1
From the Charms, select Search > Apps.
2
Find Samsung Printers.
3
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.
4
Click the management tool you want to use.
After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them
directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.
399
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Installing accessories
When you install optional devices, such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
in Device Settings to use.
1
From the Charms, select Search > Settings.
2
Search for Devices and Printers.
3
Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has a mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with the selected printer.
4
Select Device Settings.
The Printer properties window may differ depending on the driver or
operating system you are using.
5
Select the appropriate option.
6
Click OK until you exit the Printer properties window.
400
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
Troubleshooting
Problem Suggested Solutions
Samsung Printer
Experience is not shown
when you click more
settings.
Samsung Printer Experience is not installed.
Download the app. from the Windows Store and
install it.
Machine information is
not displayed when you
click the device in the
Devices and Printers.
Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
(Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click
on your printer icon and select Printer properties)
If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and
select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.
357
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact
the Samsung customer care center.
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
ALGERIA
021 36 11 00 www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
ARGENTINE
0800-555-SAMSUNG
(0800-555-7267)
www.samsung.com/
ar/support
ARMENIA
0-800-05-555 www.samsung.com/
support
AUSTRALIA
1300 362 603 www.samsung.com/
au/support
AUSTRIA
0800-SAMSUNG (0800-7267864)
[Only for Premium HA] 0800-
366661
[Only for Dealers] 0810-112233
www.samsung.com/
at/support
AZERBAIJAN
0-88-555-55-55 www.samsung.com/
support
BAHRAIN
8000-GSAM (8000-4726) www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
BELARUS
810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/
support
BANGLADESH
09612300300 www.samsung.com/
in/support
BELGIUM
02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/
be/support (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/
be_fr/support (French)
BOLIVIA
800-10-7260
[HHP] 4828210
www.samsung.com/
cl/support
BOSNIA
055 233 999 www.samsung.com/
support
BOTSWANA
8007260000 www.samsung.com/
support
BRAZIL
0800-124-421 (Demais cidades e
regiões)
4004-0000 (Capitais e grandes
centros)
www.samsung.com/
br/support
BULGARIA
800 111 31 , Безплатна
телефонна линия
www.samsung.com/
bg/support
BURUNDI
200 www.samsung.com/
support
CAMEROON
7095- 0077 www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
358
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
CANADA
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
ca/support(English)
www.samsung.com/
ca_fr/support (French)
CHILE
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
[HHP] 02-24828200
www.samsung.com/
cl/support
CHINA
400-810-5858 www.samsung.com/
cn/support
COLOMBIA
Bogotá 600 12 72
Gratis desde cualquier parte del
país 01 8000 112 112 ó desde su
celular #SAM(726)
www.samsung.com/
co/support
COSTA RICA
0-800-507-7267
00-800-1-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
CROATIA
072 726 786 www.samsung.com/
hr/support
Cote D’ Ivoire
8000 0077 www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
CYPRUS
8009 4000 only from landline, toll
free
www.samsung.com/
gr/support
CZECH
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/
cz/support
DENMARK
70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com/
dk/support
DOMINICAN
REPUBLIC
1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
DRC
499999 www.samsung.com/
support
ECUADOR
1-800-10-7267
1-800-SAMSUNG (72-6786)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/
support(English)
EGYPT
08000-7267864
16580
www.samsung.com/
eg/support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
359
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
EIRE
0818 717100 www.samsung.com/
ie/support
EL SALVADOR
800-6225
800-0726-7864
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
ESTONIA
800-7267 www.samsung.com/
ee/support
FINLAND
030-6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi/
support
FRANCE
01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com/
fr/support
GERMANY
0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw.
0180 6 7267864*
[HHP] 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw.
0180 6 67267864* (*0,20 €/Anruf
aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem
Mobilfunk max. 0,60 €/Anruf)
www.samsung.com/
de/support
GEORGIA
0-800-555-555 www.samsung.com/
support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
GHANA
0800-10077
0302-200077
www.samsung.com/
africa_en/support
GREECE
80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726
7864) only from land line
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile
and land line
www.samsung.com/
gr/support
GUATEMALA
1-800-299-0013
1-800-299-0033
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
HONDURAS
800-2791-9267
800-2791-9111
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
HONG KONG
(852) 3698 4698 www.samsung.com/
hk/support (Chinese)
www.samsung.com/
hk_en/support
(English)
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
360
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
HUNGARY
0680SAMSUNG (0680-726-786)
0680PREMIUM (0680-773-648)
www.samsung.com/
hu/support
INDIA
1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free
1800 266 8282 - Toll Free
www.samsung.com/
in/support
INDONESIA
021-56997777
08001128888
www.samsung.com/
id/support
IRAN
021-8255 [CE]
021-42132 [HHP]
www.samsung.com/
iran/support
ITALIA
800-SAMSUNG (800.7267864)
[HHP] 800.Msamsung
(800.67267864)
www.samsung.com/
it/support
JAMAICA
1-800-234-7267
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
JAPAN
0120-363-905 www.samsung.com/
jp/support
JORDAN
0800-22273
06 5777444
www.samsung.com/
levant/support
(English)
KAZAKHSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:7799,
VIP care 7700)
www.samsung.com/
support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
KENYA
0800 545 545 www.samsung.com/
support
KUWAIT
183-CALL (183-2255) www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
KYRGYZSTAN
00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/
kz_ru/support
LATVIA
8000-7267 www.samsung.com/
lv/support
LITHUANIA
8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/
lt/support
LUXEMBURG
261 03 710 www.samsung.com/
support
MACAU
0800 333 www.samsung.com/
support
MACEDONIA 023 207 777
MALAYSIA
1800-88-9999
603-77137477 (Overseas
contact)
www.samsung.com/
my/support
MAURITIUS
23052574020 www.samsung.com/
support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
361
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
MEXICO
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
mx/support
MOLDOVA
0-800-614-40 www.samsung.com/
support
MONGOLIA
+7-495-363-17-00 www.samsung.com/
support
MONTENEGRO
020 405 888 www.samsung.com/
support
MOROCCO
080 100 2255 www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
MOZAMBIQUE
847267864 / 827267864 www.samsung.com/
support
MYANMAR
+95-01-2399-888 www.samsung.com/
support
NAMIBIA
08 197 267864 www.samsung.com/
support
NIGERIA
0800-726-7864 www.samsung.com/
africa_en/support
NETHERLANDS
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864)
(€ 0,10/Min)
www.samsung.com/
nl/support
NEW ZEALAND
0800 726 786 www.samsung.com/
nz/support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
NICARAGUA
001-800-5077267 www.samsung.com/
latin/support(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
NORWAY
815 56480 www.samsung.com/
no/support
OMAN
800-SAMSUNG (800 - 726 7864) www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
PAKISTAN
0800-Samsung (72678) www.samsung.com/
pk/support
PANAMA
800-7267
800-0101
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
362
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
PARAGUAY
009-800-542-0001 www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
PERU
0800-777-08 www.samsung.com/
pe/support
PHILIPPINES
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT]
1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline
and Mobile]
02-4222111 [Other landline]
www.samsung.com/
ph/support
POLAND
801-172-678* lub +48 22 607-93-
33 *
[HHP] 801-672-678* lub +48 22
607-93-33*
* (koszt połączenia według taryfy
operatora)
www.samsung.com/
pl/support
PORTUGAL
808 20 7267 www.samsung.com/
pt/support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
PUERTO RICO
1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
QATAR
800-CALL (800-2255) www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
REUNION
262508869 www.samsung.com/
support
RWANDA
9999 www.samsung.com/
support
ROMANIA
08008 726 78 64 (08008
SAMSUNG )
Apel GRATUIT
www.samsung.com/
ro/support
RUSSIA
8-800-555-55-55 (VIP care 8-800-
555-55-88)
www.samsung.com/
ru/support
SAUDI ARABIA
8002474357 www.samsung.com/
sa/support
www.samsung.com/
sa_en/support
(English)/
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
363
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
SENEGAL
800-00-0077 www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
SERBIA
011 321 6899 www.samsung.com/
rs/support
SINGAPORE
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
sg/support
SLOVENIA
080 697 267 (brezplačna številka)
090 726 786 (0,39 EUR/min)
www.samsung.com/
rs/si
SLOVAKIA
0800 - SAMSUNG(0800-726 786) www.samsung.com/
sk/support
SOUTH AFRICA
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864) www.samsung.com/
support
SPAIN
0034902172678
[HHP] 0034902167267
www.samsung.com/
es/support
SRI LANKA
94117540540 www.samsung.com/
support
SUDAN
1969 www.samsung.com/
support
SWEDEN
0771 726 7864 (0771-SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/
se/support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
SWITZERLAND
0800 726 78 64 (0800-SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/
ch/support (German)
www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/support (French)
SYRIA
18252273 www.samsung.com/
levant/support
(English)
TADJIKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/
support
TAIWAN
0800-329999 www.samsung.com/
tw/support
TANZANIA
0800 755 755
0685 889 900
www.samsung.com/
support
THAILAND
0-2689-3232,
1800-29-3232
www.samsung.com/
th/support
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
TURKEY
444 77 11 www.samsung.com/
tr/support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
364
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
TUNISIA
80-1000-12 www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
U.A.E
800-SAMSUNG (800 -726 7864) www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
UK
0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/
uk/support
U.S.A
-Consummer
Electonics
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
us/support
U.S.A
(Mobile Phones)
1-800-SAMSUNG (72-6786)
[HHP] 1-888-987-HELP(4357)
www.samsung.com/
us/support
UGANDA
0800 300 300 www.samsung.com/
support
UKRAINE
0-800-502-000 www.samsung.com/
ua/support (Ukrainian)
www.samsung.com/
ua_ru/support
(Russian)
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
URUGUAY
000- 405-437-33 www.samsung.com/
latin/support(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/
support(English)
UZBEKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:
7799)
www.samsung.com/
support
VENEZUELA
0-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
ve/support
VIETNAM
1800 588 889 www.samsung.com/
vn/support
ZAMBIA
0211 350370 www.samsung.com/
support
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
409
Glossary
Glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as
mentioned in this user’s guide.
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE
802).
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the
paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly
called as monochrome or black and white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format
on that platform.
Glossary
410
Glossary
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced
operating system.
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage
when you move the machine.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.
Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For
example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text
on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as
the coverage.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange
data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft
Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among
non-Microsoft platforms.
DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will
automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine
can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,
reset, or initialized.
Glossary
411
Glossary
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of
IP addresses to client hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory.
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.
DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on
a home network to share information with each other across the network.
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail
in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with
a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a
month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Glossary
412
Glossary
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its
internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It
was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor
of TCP/IP networking.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an
intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of
a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Glossary
413
Glossary
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that
allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represents light and dark portions of an image when color
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of
gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a
smaller number of dots.
Mass storage device
Mass storage device, commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-
volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating
platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology
related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector
type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,
a printer).
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet
Protocol standard.
Glossary
414
Glossary
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within
one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and
secure printing solution than older ones.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization
established to standardize and regulate international radio and
telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates
telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with
no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard
method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
Glossary
415
Glossary
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status
of a machine.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a
scanner and etc.
MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of
data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most
faxes.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-
T T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR
encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
Glossary
416
Glossary
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or
rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage
in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from
contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not
itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a
standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of
complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)
developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device
independent and resolution independent format.
Glossary
417
Glossary
PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an
interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the
printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one
minute.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is
usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote
user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management
of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network
access.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,
the greater the resolution.
Glossary
418
Glossary
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication
mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email
message to the server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32
characters.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host
address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of
communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the
Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission
such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can
be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that
is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be
used for pictures that have been made by various image processing
applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains
toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms
the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination
of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
Glossary
419
Glossary
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac
operating systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the
resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB
port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter
when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,
Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to
discourage counterfeiting.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to
provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one
end point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally
introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)
computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of
WEP.
Glossary
420
Glossary
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more
advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the
wireless network connection easily without a computer.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-
independent document format.
421
Index
Index
A
accessing
management tools 398
accessories
installing 103
ordering
92
address book
editing 292
general setup
279, 293, 292
registering
291
using
291
address book setup 291
administrator’s setup 283
AirPrint 245
AnyWeb Print 338
authorized users
registering 295
B
buttons
Darkness 26
eco
28
id copy
26, 27
numeric keypad
27, 29
scan to
26, 28
C
cleaning
inside 110
outside
109
pickup roller
112
scan unit
113
cleaning a machine 109
clear button 29
control panel 26
touch screen
42
convention 16
copy
general setup 253
copying
basic copying 72
reducing or enlarging copies
74
D
default settings
tray setting 59
device options 103
direct printing utility 306
document box 279
general setup
279
driver installation
Unix 190
E
easy document creator 344
e-book conversion
344
Eco 284
eco printing 69
email address 288
searching
289, 288
entering character 290
error message 137
F
favorites settings, for printing 68
fax
automatic redialing 322
canceling a reserved fax job
324, 327
delaying a fax transmission
323
forwarding a received fax to another
destination
325, 324
general setup
259
Index
422
Index
printing faxes on both sides of the paper
330
receiving a fax in the computer
326, 330,
328, 329, 328, 322
sending a fax in the computer
323, 326
fax feature 322
fax sending
multi sending 79
faxing
adjusting darkness 81, 80
preparing to fax
78
receiving in Fax mode
80
features 5
machine features
250
print media feature
147
front view 23
G
general icons 16
general settings 269
glossary 409
google cloud printing 247
H
help button 30
I
id copy 75
installation
accessories 399
J
jam
clearing original document 118, 123
tips for avoiding paper jams
117
L
LCD display
browsing the machine status 253, 258, 259,
263, 266, 276
Linux
common Linux problems 379
driver installation for network connected
189, 177, 178
printer properties
310, 309
scanning
321, 155
using SetIP
183
linux scanning 321
loading
paper in multi-purpose tray 53, 50
special media
55
loading originals 61
M
Mac
common Mac problems 378
driver installation for network connected
188, 175, 176
printing
307
scanning
320, 154
using SetIP
182
mac scanning 320
machine information 253, 258, 259, 263,
266, 276
machine setup
machine status 253, 258, 259, 263, 266,
276
maintenance parts 93
memory
memory upgrading 105
memory/hard drive feature 331, 332
Index
423
Index
menu overview 36
multi-purpose tray
loading 53
using special media
55
N
network
driver installation
Linux
189
Mac
188
UNIX
190
Windows
184
general setup
280
installing environment
156, 180
IPv6 configuration
192
SetIP program
181, 182, 183, 229
wired network setup
181, 195
n-up printing
Mac 308
O
optional tray 92
loading paper
50
ordering
92
output support 60
overlay printing
create 303
delete
303
print
303
P
Parallel
ordering 92
placing a machine
adjusting the altitude 287
postScript driver
troubleshooting 380
preparing originals type 61
print
general setup 252
mobile OS
237
print media
card stock 58
envelope
56
labels
58
output support
147
photo paper
59
setting the paper size
59, 55
transparency
57
print menu 252
printer preferences
Linux 310
printer status
general information 348
printing
changing the default print settings 296
Linux
309
Mac
307
multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Mac
308
printing a document
Windows
65
Mac
308
298
setting as a default machine
297, 299
UNIX
311, 84
using direct printing utility
306
printing a document
Linux 309
Mac
307
UNIX
311
printing feature 296
Index
424
Index
problem
operating system problems 377
problems
copying problems 372
faxing problems
375
paper feeding problems
358, 359, 360, 364
scanning problems
373
R
rear view 25
regulatiory information 157
reports
machine information 253, 259, 261, 262,
266, 270, 276, 277
reset button 30
resolution
faxing 80
S
safety
information 17
symbols
17
samsung printer experience 350, 391
Samsung Printer Status 348
scan
general setup 264
Scan Assitant 319
scan feature 313
Scanning
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assitant 319
scanning
basic information 313
Linux scanning
321
Mac
320
Scanning from image editing program
318,
314, 315, 317, 318
USB flash memory
83
secu printing 71
service contact numbers 401
SetIP program 181, 229
Special features 286
specifications 144
print media
147
status 28, 30
Storing 288
supplies
available supplies 90
estimated toner cartridge life
95
monitoring the supplies life
107
ordering
90
replacing toner cartridge
98
SyncThru Web Service
general information 340
SyncThru™ Web Service 340
T
toner cartridge
estimated life 95
handling instructions
94
non-Samsung and refilled
94
redistributing toner
96, 98
storing
94
tray
adjusting the width and length 49
changing the tray size
49
loading paper in multi-purpose tray
53
ordering an optional tray
92
setting the paper size and type
59
troubleshooting 400
U
understanding the status LED 135
Index
425
Index
UNIX
driver installation for network connected
190
printing
311
Unix
system requirements 155
USB 285
USB cable
driver installation 32, 34, 175, 177, 176, 178
USB flash memory
data backup 85
managing
86
printing
84
scanning
83
using help 68, 309
W
watermark
create 302
delete
302
edit
302
Windows
common Windows problems 377
driver installation for network connected
184, 32, 34, 386, 384, 388
system requirements
153
using SetIP
181, 229
Windows 8
driver uninstallation 390
network
driver installation
386
USB cable
driver installation
384
wireless
driver installation
388
wireless
ad hoc mode 195
Infrastructure mode
195
USB cable
202, 205, 210
WPS
disconnecting
199
PBC mode
199
PBC
200
wireless LED 30
wireless network
network cable 229
59

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Samsung-CLX-4195FN
6

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Samsung CLX-4195FN bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Samsung CLX-4195FN in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 59,21 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Samsung CLX-4195FN

Samsung CLX-4195FN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 435 pagina's

Samsung CLX-4195FN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 411 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info